1
Download UNIVERSAL THREE PHASE
Transcript
User Manual Models 8101/8102 100 MHz Single / Dual Function / Arbitrary Generators Publication No. 0901013 Tabor Electronics Ltd. Tabor Electronics Ltd. P.O. Box 404, Tel Hanan Israel 20302 Tel: +972-4-821-3393, FAX: +972-4-821-3388 PUBLICATION DATE: January 13, 2009 Copyright 2005 by Tabor Electronics Ltd. Printed in Israel. All rights reserved. This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher. WARRANTY STATEMENT Products sold by Tabor Electronics Ltd. are warranted to be free from defects in workmanship or materials. Tabor Electronics Ltd. will, at its option, either repair or replace any hardware products which prove to be defective during the warranty period. You are a valued customer. Our mission is to make any necessary repairs in a reliable and timely manner. Duration of Warranty The warranty period for this Tabor Electronics Ltd. hardware is three years, except software and firmware products designed for use with Tabor Electronics Ltd. Hardware is warranted not to fail to execute its programming instructions due to defect in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to the initial end user. Return of Product Authorization is required from Tabor Electronics before you send us your product for service or calibration. Call your nearest Tabor Electronics support facility. If you are unsure where to call, contact Tabor Electronics Ltd. Tel Hanan, Israel at 972-4-821-3393 or via fax at 972-4-821-3388. We can be reached at: [email protected] Limitation of Warranty Tabor Electronics Ltd. shall be released from all obligations under this warranty in the event repairs or modifications are made by persons other than authorized Tabor Electronics service personnel or without the written consent of Tabor Electronics. Tabor Electronics Ltd. expressly disclaims any liability to its customers, dealers and representatives and to users of its product, and to any other person or persons, for special or consequential damages of any kind and from any cause whatsoever arising out of or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance, replacement or use of said products. Representations and warranties made by any person including dealers and representatives of Tabor Electronics Ltd., which are inconsistent or in conflict with the terms of this warranty (including but not limited to the limitations of the liability of Tabor Electronics Ltd. as set forth above), shall not be binding upon Tabor Electronics Ltd. unless reduced to writing and approved by an officer of Tabor Electronics Ltd. Except as stated above, Tabor Electronics Ltd. makes no warranty, express or implied (either in fact or by operation of law), statutory or otherwise; and except to the extent stated above, Tabor Electronics Ltd. shall have no liability under any warranty, express or implied (either in fact or by operation of law), statutory or otherwise. PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the technical data herein disclosed, are proprietary to Tabor Electronics, and shall not, without express written permission of Tabor Electronics, be used, in whole or in part to solicit quotations from a competitive source or used for manufacture by anyone other than Tabor Electronics. The information herein has been developed at private expense, and may only be used for operation and maintenance reference purposes or for purposes of engineering evaluation and incorporation into technical specifications and other documents, which specify procurement of products from Tabor Electronics. FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting, maintenance or exploratory procedure, read carefully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices. This equipment contains voltage hazardous to human life and safety, and is capable of inflicting personal injury. If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line (mains) through an autotransformer, ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral (earth pole) of the power supply. Before operating the unit, ensure the conductor (green wire) is connected to the ground (earth) conductor of the power outlet. Do not use a two-conductor extension cord or a three-prong/two-prong adapter. This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the power cord. Maintenance and calibration procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed. Read the procedures and heed warnings to avoid “live” circuits points. Before operation this instrument: 1. Ensure the instrument is configured to operate on the voltage at the power source. See Installation Section. 2. Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate. 3. Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to this instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third-wire earth ground. If the instrument: - fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do not operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We: Tabor Electronics Ltd. 9 Hatasia Street, Tel Hanan ISRAEL 36888 declare, that the 100MHz Arbitrary Function Generators Models 8101 and 8102 complies with the requirements of the Electro Magnetic Compatibility 89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC, 92/263/EEC and 93/97/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, according to testing performed at ORDOS/E.M.I TEST LABs (#5TBR964CX, Oct. 2005). Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official Journal of the European Communities: Safety: IEC/EN 61010-1 2nd Edition: 2001+ C1, C2 EMC: EN55022:2001 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emission IEC61000-3-2:2001(Am1) Harmonics IEC61000-3-3:2002(Am1) Flickers IEC61000-4-2:2001(Am1+Am2) ESD : Contact Discharge ±4Kv Air Discharge ±8Kv IEC61000-4-3:2002(Am1) Radiated immunity - 3V/m (80MHz-1000MHz) IEC61000-4-4:2001 (Am2) Electrical Fast Transient and Burst ±1.0kV, 5KHz IEC61000-4-5:2001 (Am1) Surges DM ±1.0kV CM ±2.0Kv IEC61000-4-6:2003 Current injection immunity - 3Vrms IEC61000-4-8:2001 Magnetic field 1Amper IEC61000-4-11:2001 Voltage dips and variation Models 8101 and 8102 are built on the same platform and share specifications and features except the 8101 is a single channel version and while the 8102 has two channels. The tests were performed on a typical configuration. Table of Contents Chapter 1 Title Page Getting Started.................................................................................................................... 1-1 What’s in This Chapter....................................................................................................... 1-3 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 8102 Feature Highlights ..................................................................................................... 1-3 ArbConnection Feature Highlights...................................................................................... 1-4 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 1-6 Safety Considerations ........................................................................................................ 1-8 Supplied Accessories......................................................................................................... 1-8 Specifications..................................................................................................................... 1-8 Functional Description........................................................................................................ 1-9 Front Panel Connectors and Indicators .............................................................................. 1-9 Main Output - Channels 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 1-9 SYNC Output.............................................................................................................. 1-9 Front Panel Controls .......................................................................................................... 1-9 Rear Panel Input & Output Connectors .............................................................................. 1-12 TRIG IN ...................................................................................................................... 1-12 REF IN........................................................................................................................ 1-13 LAN ............................................................................................................................ 1-13 USB ............................................................................................................................ 1-13 GPIB........................................................................................................................... 1-13 AC LINE ..................................................................................................................... 1-13 AC FUSE.................................................................................................................... 1-13 i 8101/8102 User Manual Run Modes ........................................................................................................................ 1-14 Continuous ........................................................................................................................ 1-14 Triggered ........................................................................................................................... 1-14 Burst .................................................................................................................................. 1-15 Gated................................................................................................................................. 1-15 Delayed Trigger ................................................................................................................. 1-15 Re-Trigger.......................................................................................................................... 1-15 Trigger Source ................................................................................................................... 1-16 External ............................................................................................................................. 1-17 Bus .................................................................................................................................... 1-17 Mixed ................................................................................................................................. 1-17 Output Type ....................................................................................................................... 1-18 Standard Waveforms ......................................................................................................... 1-18 Arbitrary Waveforms .......................................................................................................... 1-19 Modulated Waveforms ....................................................................................................... 1-21 Modulation Off ............................................................................................................ 1-22 AM.............................................................................................................................. 1-22 FM .............................................................................................................................. 1-22 FSK ............................................................................................................................ 1-22 PSK ............................................................................................................................ 1-23 Sweep ........................................................................................................................ 1-23 Modulation Run Modes ...................................................................................................... 1-23 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................. 1-23 Digital Pulse Generator...................................................................................................... 1-23 Output State....................................................................................................................... 1-25 Customizing the Output Units............................................................................................. 1-25 Programming the Model 8102 ............................................................................................ 1-25 2 Configuring the Instrument .............................................................................................. 2-1 Installation Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-3 Unpacking and Initial Inspection......................................................................................... 2-3 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 2-3 Performance Checks.......................................................................................................... 2-4 Power Requirements.......................................................................................................... 2-4 Grounding Requirements ................................................................................................... 2-4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment ............................................................. 2-5 Preparation for Use ............................................................................................................ 2-5 Installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-5 Installing Software Utilities ................................................................................................. 2-6 Controlling the Instrument from Remote............................................................................. 2-6 ii Contents (continued) Connecting to a Remote interface ...................................................................................... 2-7 Selecting a Remote interface ............................................................................................. 2-7 GPIB Configuration......................................................................................................... 2-8 USB Configuration.......................................................................................................... 2-9 LAN Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2-15 Choosing a Static IP Address...................................................................................... 2-17 3 Using the Instrument ......................................................................................................... 3-1 Overview............................................................................................................................3-3 Inter-Channel Dependency ................................................................................................3-3 Inter-Channel Phase Dependency ............................................................................... 3-3 Output Termination ............................................................................................................3-3 Input / Output Protection ....................................................................................................3-4 Power On/Reset Defaults...................................................................................................3-4 Controlling the 8102 ...........................................................................................................3-6 8102 Front Panel Menus ....................................................................................................3-7 Enabling the Outputs........................................................................................................3-11 Selecting a Waveform Type .............................................................................................3-12 Changing the Output Frequency ......................................................................................3-13 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency ...........................................................................3-14 Programming the Amplitude and Offset............................................................................3-15 Selecting a Run Mode......................................................................................................3-17 Selecting the Modulation Run Modes ...............................................................................3-18 Triggered Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-18 Delayed Trigger .......................................................................................................... 3-19 Re-Trigger................................................................................................................... 3-19 Gated Mode ................................................................................................................ 3-20 Burst Mode ................................................................................................................. 3-21 Using the Manual Trigger .................................................................................................3-22 Using the SYNC Output ...................................................................................................3-22 Applying Filters ................................................................................................................3-23 Generating Standard Waveforms .....................................................................................3-24 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ......................................................................................3-34 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms?................................................................................. 3-35 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ................................................................................ 3-35 Generating Modulated Waveforms...................................................................................3-37 Off ............................................................................................................................... 3-38 iii 8101/8102 User Manual AM............................................................................................................................... 3-39 FM............................................................................................................................... 3-41 FSK ............................................................................................................................. 3-42 PSK............................................................................................................................. 3-44 Sweep ......................................................................................................................... 3-46 Using the Auxiliary Functions ...........................................................................................3-47 Using the Digital Pulse Generator .............................................................................. 3-47 Pulse Generator Menus .......................................................................................... 3-50 Pulse Design Limitations..................................................................................................3-52 Understanding the Basics of Phase Offset between Channels.................................. 3-53 Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard Waveforms ................................................... 3-54 Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary Waveforms .................................................... 3-56 Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated Waveforms................................................. 3-56 Customizing the Output Units...........................................................................................3-56 Selecting the Horizontal Units .................................................................................... 3-56 Adjusting Load Impedance ......................................................................................... 3-57 Monitoring the Internal Temperature ................................................................................3-57 4 ArbConnection© ................................................................................................................. 4-1 What’s in This Chapter?.....................................................................................................4-3 Introduction to ArbConnection............................................................................................4-3 Installing ArbConnection ....................................................................................................4-3 Quitting ArbConnection................................................................................................. 4-4 For the New and Advanced Users................................................................................ 4-4 Conventions Used in This Manual................................................................................ 4-4 The Opening Screen ..........................................................................................................4-5 ArbConnection Features ....................................................................................................4-6 The Control Panels ............................................................................................................4-6 The Operation Panels................................................................................................... 4-8 Main .......................................................................................................................... 4-8 Standard.................................................................................................................. 4-10 Arbitrary................................................................................................................... 4-11 Using the Memory Partition Table .......................................................................... 4-13 Trigger..................................................................................................................... 4-15 The Modulation Panels ............................................................................................... 4-16 FM ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 AM ........................................................................................................................... 4-18 Sweep ..................................................................................................................... 4-19 FSK/PSK ................................................................................................................. 4-20 iv Contents (continued) The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panels ....................................................................... 4-22 The System Panels..................................................................................................... 4-23 General/Filters......................................................................................................... 4-23 Calibration ............................................................................................................... 4-24 The Composers Panels .............................................................................................. 4-25 The Wave Composer .............................................................................................. 4-25 The Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-32 The Waveform Screen................................................................................................ 4-33 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor ...........................................................4-34 Writing Equations........................................................................................................ 4-36 Equation Convention .................................................................................................. 4-37 Typing Equations ........................................................................................................ 4-38 Equation Samples....................................................................................................... 4-39 Combining Waveforms ............................................................................................... 4-43 The Pulse Composer .............................................................................................. 4-45 The Command Editor .......................................................................................................4-63 Logging SCPI Commands................................................................................................4-63 5 Remote Programming Reference...................................................................................... 5-1 What’s in This Chapter..................................................................................................... 5-3 Introduction to SCPI......................................................................................................... 5-3 Command Format.......................................................................................................... 5-4 Command Separator ..................................................................................................... 5-4 The MIN and MAX Parameters ..................................................................................... 5-5 Querying Parameter Setting .......................................................................................... 5-5 Query Response Format ............................................................................................... 5-5 SCPI Command Terminator .......................................................................................... 5-5 IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands......................................................................... 5-5 SCPI Parameter Type.................................................................................................... 5-6 Numeric Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Discrete Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Boolean Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Arbitrary Block Parameters ........................................................................................ 5-6 Binary Block Parameters ........................................................................................... 5-7 SCPI Syntax and Styles................................................................................................... 5-7 Instrument Control Commands ........................................................................................ 5-14 Standard Waveforms Control Commands........................................................................ 5-21 Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands......................................................................... 5-28 v 8101/8102 User Manual Modulated Waveforms Control Commands...................................................................... 5-35 FM Modulation Programming ........................................................................................ 5-38 AM modulation Programming ........................................................................................ 5-41 Sweep Modulation Programming .................................................................................. 5-42 FSK Modulation Programming ...................................................................................... 5-45 PSK Modulation Programming ...................................................................................... 5-46 Run Mode Commands ..................................................................................................... 5-50 Auxiliary Commands........................................................................................................ 5-55 Digital Pulse Programming ............................................................................................ 5-56 System Commands ....................................................................................................... 5-61 IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries ....................................................... 5-66 The SCPI Status Registers............................................................................................ 5-67 The Status Byte Register (STB) .................................................................................... 5-67 Reading the Status Byte Register ............................................................................. 5-68 Clearing the Status Byte Register ............................................................................. 5-68 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) .................................................................. 5-70 Standard Event Status Register (ESR)...................................................................... 5-70 Standard Event Status Enable Register (ESE) ......................................................... 5-71 Error Messages ............................................................................................................... 5-72 6 Performance Checks.......................................................................................................... 6-1 What’s in This Chapter ............................................................................................................ 6-3 Performance Checks ............................................................................................................... 6-3 Environmental Conditions........................................................................................................ 6-3 Warm-up Period ................................................................................................................... 6-4 Initial Instrument Setting....................................................................................................... 6-4 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................................. 6-4 Test Procedures....................................................................................................................... 6-4 Frequency Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 6-4 Frequency Accuracy, Internal Reference......................................................................... 6-5 Frequency Accuracy, External 10MHz Reference........................................................... 6-5 Amplitude Accuracy ............................................................................................................. 6-6 Amplitude Accuracy, DAC Output .................................................................................... 6-6 Amplitude Accuracy, DDS Output .................................................................................... 6-6 Offset Accuracy .................................................................................................................... 6-7 Offset Accuracy, DAC Output........................................................................................... 6-7 Offset Accuracy, DDS Output........................................................................................... 6-8 Squarewave Characteristics ................................................................................................ 6-8 Squarewave Checks......................................................................................................... 6-8 Skew Between Channels ................................................................................................. 6-9 vi Contents (continued) Sinewave Characteristics..................................................................................................... 6-9 Sinewave Distortions, DAC Output ................................................................................ 6-10 Sinewave Spectral Purity, DAC Output.......................................................................... 6-10 Sinewave Spectral Purity, DDS Output.......................................................................... 6-11 Sinewave Flatness, DAC Output.................................................................................... 6-11 Sinewave Flatness, DDS Output.................................................................................... 6-12 Trigger operation Characteristics....................................................................................... 6-12 Trigger, Gate, and Burst Characteristics........................................................................ 6-13 Mixed Trigger Advance Test .......................................................................................... 6-13 Delayed Trigger Characteristics..................................................................................... 6-15 Re-trigger Characteristics............................................................................................... 6-16 Trigger Slope .................................................................................................................. 6-17 Trigger Level................................................................................................................... 6-17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics .............................................................................. 6-18 FM - Standard Waveforms ............................................................................................. 6-18 Triggered FM - Standard Waveforms ............................................................................ 6-19 FM Burst - Standard Waveforms.................................................................................... 6-20 Gated FM - Standard Waveforms .................................................................................. 6-21 Re-triggered FM Bursts - Standard Waveforms ............................................................ 6-22 AM................................................................................................................................... 6-23 FSK ................................................................................................................................. 6-24 PSK ................................................................................................................................. 6-25 Sweep ............................................................................................................................. 6-26 SYNC Output operation ..................................................................................................... 6-27 SYNC Qualifier - Bit........................................................................................................ 6-27 SYNC Source ................................................................................................................. 6-27 Waveform Memory Operation............................................................................................ 6-29 Waveform memory ......................................................................................................... 6-29 Remote Interfaces .............................................................................................................. 6-29 GPIB Control................................................................................................................... 6-30 USB Control.................................................................................................................... 6-30 LAN Control .................................................................................................................... 6-31 7 Adjustments and Firmware Update .................................................................................. 7-1 hat’s in This Chapter ................................................................................................................ 7-3 Performance Checks ............................................................................................................... 7-3 Environmental Conditions........................................................................................................ 7-3 Warm-up Period ................................................................................................................... 7-3 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................................. 7-4 Adjustment Procedures ........................................................................................................... 7-4 vii 8101/8102 User Manual Reference Oscillators Adjustments ......................................................................................... 7-6 Base Line Offset Adjustments.............................................................................................. 7-8 Offset Adjustments ............................................................................................................. 7-11 Amplitude Adjustments ...................................................................................................... 7-15 Pulse Response Adjustments ............................................................................................ 7-24 Flatness Adjustments......................................................................................................... 7-24 Base Line Offset Adjustments............................................................................................ 7-29 Offset Adjustments ............................................................................................................. 7-32 Amplitude Adjustments ...................................................................................................... 7-36 Pulse Response Adjustments ............................................................................................ 7-44 Flatness Adjustments......................................................................................................... 7-45 Updating 8102 Firmware.................................................................................................... 7-49 Appendices A Specifications ..................................................................................................................... A-1 viii List of Tables Chapter Title Page 1-1, Run Modes and Trigger Source Options Summary .............................................................. 1-15 1-2, Trigger Source Options Summary ........................................................................................ 1-16 2-1, Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 ....................................... 2-17 3-1, Default Conditions After Reset ............................................................................................ 3-5 3-2, Front Panel Waveform Menus............................................................................................. 3-8 3-3, Front Panel Run Mode Menus ............................................................................................ 3-9 3-4, Front Panel Utility and Output Menus................................................................................ 3-10 3-5, Front Panel Auxiliary Menus ............................................................................................. 3-10 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary ...................................................................... 5-8 5-2, Instrument Control Commands Summary ......................................................................... 5-14 5-3, Instrument Control Commands Summary ......................................................................... 5-21 5-4, Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary ...................................................................... 5-29 5-5, Modulated Waveforms Commands ................................................................................... 5-35 5-6, Run Mode Commands ...................................................................................................... 5-50 5-7, Auxiliary Commands ......................................................................................................... 5-55 5-8, System Commands Summary........................................................................................... 5-61 6-1, Recommended Test Equipment.......................................................................................... 6-4 6-2, Frequency Accuracy ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6-3, Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference ..................................................... 6-5 6-4, Amplitude Accuracy, DAC output ........................................................................................ 6-6 6-5, Amplitude Accuracy, DDS output ........................................................................................ 6-7 ix 8101/8102 User Manual 6-6, Offset Accuracy, DAC Output .......................................................................................... 6-7 6-7, Offset Accuracy, DDS Output .......................................................................................... 6-8 6-8, Square wave Characteristics ........................................................................................... 6-9 6-9, Sinewave Distortion, DAC Output Tests ........................................................................ 6-10 6-10, Sinewave Spectral Purity, DAC Output Test ............................................................... 6-10 6-12, Sinewave Flatness, DAC Output Test ......................................................................... 6-12 6-13, Sinewave Flatness, DDS Output Test ......................................................................... 6-12 6-14, Trigger, gate, and burst Characteristics....................................................................... 6-13 6-15, Trigger Delay Tests ...................................................................................................... 6-15 6-16, Re-Trigger Delay Tests ................................................................................................ 6-16 7-1, Recommended calibration for Adjustments ..................................................................... 7-4 x List of Figures Chapter Title Page 1-1, Model 8102 ............................................................................................................................ 1-4 1-2, ArbConnection – The Control Panels ..................................................................................... 1-5 1-3, ArbConnection – The Wave Composer .................................................................................. 1-5 1-4, ArbConnection – The Pulse Composer .................................................................................. 1-6 1-5, 8102 Front Panel Controls ................................................................................................... 1-10 1-6, 8102 Rear Panel .................................................................................................................. 1-12 1-7, Typical 8102 Standard Waveforms Display.......................................................................... 1-19 1-8, ArbConnection Example - Typical Standard Waveforms Panel ............................................ 1-19 1-9, Typical 8102 Arbitrary Waveforms Display........................................................................... 1-20 1-10, ArbConnection Example – Typical Arbitrary Waveforms Panel .......................................... 1-21 1-11, Typical Modulated waveform Display ................................................................................. 1-21 1-12, ArbConnection Example – FM Modulation Panel ............................................................... 1-22 1-13, 8102 Digital Pulse Generator Menu Example..................................................................... 1-24 1-14, ArbConnection Digital Pulse Generator Panel Example ..................................................... 1-24 2-1, Selecting a Remote interface ................................................................................................. 2-8 2-2, GPIB Configuration Screen .................................................................................................... 2-9 2-3, USB Device Detected .......................................................................................................... 2-10 2-4, Found New Hardware Wizard .............................................................................................. 2-10 2-5, Choose Your Search and installation Options ...................................................................... 2-11 2-6, Windows Logo Warning Message ........................................................................................ 2-11 2-7, New Hardware Found and Software installed....................................................................... 2-12 xi List of Figures (continued) 2-8, Found New Hardware - USB Serial Port .............................................................................. 2-12 2-9, Choose Your Search and installation Options ...................................................................... 2-13 2-11, New Hardware Found and Software installed..................................................................... 2-14 2-12, Model 8102 Configured for USB Operation ........................................................................ 2-15 2-13, LAN Configuration Screen.................................................................................................. 2-16 3-1, Reset 8102 to Factory Defaults.............................................................................................. 3-5 3-2, 8102 Front Panel Operation ................................................................................................... 3-6 3-3, Enabling and Disabling the Outputs ..................................................................................... 3-11 3-4, Selecting an Output Waveform Type.................................................................................... 3-12 3-5, Modifying Output Frequency ................................................................................................ 3-13 3-6, Modifying Sample Clock Frequency ..................................................................................... 3-14 3-7, Programming Amplitude and Offset ..................................................................................... 3-16 3-8, Run Mode Options ............................................................................................................... 3-17 3-9, Trigger Run Mode Parameters............................................................................................. 3-19 3-10, Gated Mode Parameters.................................................................................................... 3-21 3-11, Burst Run Mode Parameters.............................................................................................. 3-22 3-12, SYNC and Filter Parameters.............................................................................................. 3-23 3-13, Built-in Standard Waveforms Menu.................................................................................... 3-25 3-14, the Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms.......................................... 3-34 3-15, Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters................................................................... 3-37 3-16, Selecting a modulated Waveform....................................................................................... 3-38 3-17, Modulation OFF Parameters .............................................................................................. 3-39 3-18, AM Menus.......................................................................................................................... 3-40 3-19, Modulating Waveform Shapes ........................................................................................... 3-40 3-20, FM Modulation Parameters ................................................................................................ 3-42 3-21, Modulation Waveform Shapes ........................................................................................... 3-42 3-22, FSK Control Data String Example ...................................................................................... 3-43 3-23, FSK Menus ........................................................................................................................ 3-44 3-24, PSK Control Data String Example...................................................................................... 3-45 3-25, PSK Menus ........................................................................................................................ 3-45 3-26, Sweep Menus .................................................................................................................... 3-46 xii 8101/8102 User Manual 3-27, Accessing the Pulse Generator Menus .............................................................................. 3-48 3-28, the Digital Pulse Generator Menus..................................................................................... 3-48 3-29, Programming the Pulse Period Parameter ......................................................................... 3-49 3-30, Double Pulse Mode............................................................................................................ 3-51 3-31, Programming Phase Offset Between Channels ................................................................. 3-55 3-32, Changing the Start Phase on the Sine Waveform .............................................................. 3-55 3-33, Customizing the Output Parameters .................................................................................. 3-57 3-34, Reading the 8102 Internal Temperature............................................................................. 3-58 4-1, Startup & Communication Options ......................................................................................... 4-5 4-2, ArbConnection's Toolbars ...................................................................................................... 4-5 4-2a, the Panels Toolbar............................................................................................................... 4-6 4-3, the Main Panel ....................................................................................................................... 4-9 4-3a -, the Operation Panels ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4-4, the Standard Waveforms Panel ........................................................................................... 4-10 4-5, the Arbitrary Panel ............................................................................................................... 4-12 4-6, the Memory Partition Table .................................................................................................. 4-14 4-7, the Trigger Panel ................................................................................................................. 4-15 4-8, the FM Panel ....................................................................................................................... 4-17 4-8a, the Modulation Panels........................................................................................................ 4-16 4-9, the AM Panel ....................................................................................................................... 4-18 4-10, the Sweep Modulation Panel.............................................................................................. 4-19 4-11, the FSK/PSK Modulation Panel.......................................................................................... 4-20 4-12, the Digital Pulse Generator Panel ...................................................................................... 4-22 4-13, the General/Filters Panel.................................................................................................... 4-23 4-13a, the System Panels ........................................................................................................... 4-23 4-14, the Utility Panel .................................................................................................................. 4-25 4-15, the Wave Composer Opening Screen................................................................................ 4-26 4-15a, the Composers Panels..................................................................................................... 4-25 4-16, the Open Waveform Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 4-28 4-17, Zooming In on Waveform Segments .................................................................................. 4-30 4-18, Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built-in Library .................................................. 4-32 xiii List of Figures (continued) 4-19, the Toolbar Icons ............................................................................................................... 4-32 4-20, the Waveform Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-33 4-21, the Equation Editor Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 4-34 4-22, an Equation Editor Example............................................................................................... 4-39 4-23, Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms. ................................................... 4-40 4-24, Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion. ......................................... 4-41 4-25, Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave ......................... 4-42 4-26, Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Upper and Lower Sidebands... 4-43 4-27, Combining Waveforms into Equations................................................................................ 4-44 4-28, the Pulse Composer Screen .............................................................................................. 4-46 4-29, the Pulse Editor.................................................................................................................. 4-48 4-30, the Pulse Editor Options .................................................................................................... 4-49 4-31, the Pulse Composer Toolbar Icons .................................................................................... 4-50 4-32, Complete Pulse Train Design............................................................................................. 4-51 4-33, Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design ................................................................................... 4-51 4-34, Selecting Pulse Editor Options........................................................................................... 4-52 4-35, Using the Pulse Editor........................................................................................................ 4-54 4-36, Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example ............................................................................ 4-56 4-37, Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example ............................................................................ 4-57 4-38, Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example ............................................................................ 4-59 4-39, Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example ............................................................................ 4-60 4-40, Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example ............................................................................ 4-61 4-41, the Pulse Editor Download Summary................................................................................. 4-62 4-42, the Command Editor .......................................................................................................... 4-63 4-43, Log File Example ............................................................................................................... 4-64 5-1, Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format ..................................................................... 5-30 5-2, 16-bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation ............................................................ 5-30 5-3, 16-bit Waveform Data Point Representation ..................................................................... 5-31 5-4, Segment Address and Size Example ................................................................................ 5-33 5-5. SCPI Status Registers ...................................................................................................... 5-69 7-1, Calibration Password .......................................................................................................... 7-5 7-2, Calibration Panel................................................................................................................. 7-5 xiv 8101/8102 User Manual 7-3, Software Version Screen................................................................................................ 7-50 7-4, The NETConfig Utility ..................................................................................................... 7-51 7-5, Check for Progress Bar Movement ................................................................................ 7-52 7-6, WW8102 has been Detected on the LAN Network ....................................................... 7-52 7-7, The Firmware Update Dialog Box .................................................................................. 7-53 7-8, Firmware Update Path.................................................................................................... 7-54 7-9, Firmware Update Completed ......................................................................................... 7-54 xv Chapter 1 Getting Started Title Page What’s in This Chapter......................................................................................................... 1-3 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 1-3 8102 Feature Highlights....................................................................................................... 1-3 ArbConnection Feature Highlights ....................................................................................... 1-4 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 1-6 Safety Considerations.......................................................................................................... 1-8 Supplied Accessories........................................................................................................... 1-8 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-8 Functional Description ......................................................................................................... 1-9 Front Panel Connectors and Indicators ................................................................................1-9 Main Output - Channels 1 and 2....................................................................................1-9 SYNC Output.................................................................................................................1-9 Front Panel Controls.............................................................................................................1-9 Rear Panel Input & Output Connectors ................................................................................1-12 TRIG IN .........................................................................................................................1-12 REF IN...........................................................................................................................1-13 LAN ...............................................................................................................................1-13 USB ...............................................................................................................................1-13 GPIB ..............................................................................................................................1-13 AC LINE ........................................................................................................................1-13 AC FUSE .......................................................................................................................1-13 Run Modes........................................................................................................................... 1-14 Continuous............................................................................................................................1-14 Triggered ..............................................................................................................................1-14 Burst .....................................................................................................................................1-15 Gated ....................................................................................................................................1-15 Delayed Trigger ................................................................................................................... 1-15 Re-Trigger............................................................................................................................ 1-15 Trigger Source ..................................................................................................................... 1-16 8101/8102 User Manual External ................................................................................................................................1-17 Bus .......................................................................................................................................1-17 Mixed ....................................................................................................................................1-17 Output Type ..........................................................................................................................1-18 Standard Waveforms ............................................................................................................1-18 Arbitrary Waveforms .............................................................................................................1-19 Modulated Waveforms..........................................................................................................1-21 Modulation Off ...............................................................................................................1-22 AM .................................................................................................................................1-22 FM .................................................................................................................................1-22 FSK ...............................................................................................................................1-22 PSK ...............................................................................................................................1-23 Sweep ...........................................................................................................................1-23 Modulation Run Modes .........................................................................................................1-23 Auxiliary Functions................................................................................................................1-23 Digital Pulse Generator ........................................................................................................1-23 Output State..........................................................................................................................1-25 Customizing the Output Units ...............................................................................................1-25 Programming the Model 8102...............................................................................................1-25 1-2 Getting Started What’s in This Chapter What’s in This Chapter 1 This chapter contains a general description of the Model 8102 Waveform Generator and an overall functional description of the instrument. It also describes the front and rear panel connectors and indicators. NOTE This manual is common to both Model 8101 and Model 8102. If you purchased the Model 8101, please ignore all references to the second channel in this manual. Model 8102 is a dual-channel, Function Arbitrary Generator. It is a high performance waveform generator that combines two separate and powerful channels in one small package. Supplied free with the instrument is ArbConnection software utility, which is used for controlling the 8102 and for generating, editing and downloading waveforms from a remote computer. The following highlights the 8102 and ArbConnection features. Introduction 8102 Feature Highlights • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Dual output configuration with Independent waveform control Tight phase offset control between channels (1 point resolution) 16-bit vertical resolution Generates signals up to 32 Vp-p (into high impedance load) 512k memory depth for each channel 250 MS/s sample clock frequency 100 MHz output bandwidth 1 ppm clock stability Extremely low phase noise carrier FM, AM, FSK, PSK and sweep Built-in standard waveforms; Remote calibration without removing case covers Auxiliary pulse generator GPIB, USB and Ethernet interfaces 1-3 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 1-1, Model 8102 ArbConnection Feature Highlights • • • • • • • Three powerful tools in one software package: Complete instrument control, Waveform and pulse composers Detailed virtual front panels control all 8102 functions and modes Wave composer generates, edits and downloads complex waveforms Easy, on-screen generation of complex pulses using the pulse composer Equation editor generates waveforms from equations SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation Translates waveform coordinates from ASCII and other formats Various screens of the ArbConnection program are shown in Figures 1-2 through 1-4. 1-4 Getting Started ArbConnection Feature Highlights 1 Figure 1-2, ArbConnection – The Control Panels Figure 1-3, ArbConnection – The Wave Composer 1-5 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 1-4, ArbConnection – The Pulse Composer Introduction A detailed functional description is given following the general description of the features, functions, and options available with the Model 8102. The Model 8102 is a bench-top, 2U high, half rack wide, dualchannel Function Arbitrary Generator, a high performance instrument that provides multiple and powerful functions in one small package. The 8102 generates an array of standard waveforms from a built-in waveform library as well as arbitrary and modulated waveforms. The generator outputs 16-bit waveforms from two channels at up to 250MS/s with different waveform properties. The unique design provides increased dynamic range and lower “noise floor” making it ideal for the generation of multitone signals. Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS) technology, utilized in the design of the 8102, allows flexibility in usage of features like AM, FM, FSK, PSK and sweep. The DDS circuit has an independent memory that can be used as an arbitrary modulation source. For example, the FM feature can be stimulated by an internal source, or arbitrary FM waveform allowing the production of customized chirp signals. The included ArbConnection software can be used to breadboard custom frequency modulation profiles graphically. Sample rates up to 250MS/s are available with memory size up to 512k. Channels 1 and 2 are both synchronized to the same sampling clock however, each channel can output a different waveform shape and length. 1-6 Getting Started Introduction 1 Based entirely on digital design, the 8102 has no analog functions resident in its hardware circuits and therefore, data has to be downloaded to the instrument for it to start generating waveforms. The instrument can compute and generate a number of standard functions such as sine, square, triangle and others. Complex waveforms can be computed in external utilities, converted to an appropriate format and downloaded to the 8102 as waveform coordinates. Dedicated waveform memory stores waveforms in memory segments and allows playback of a selected waveform, when required. The waveforms are backed up by batteries or can be stored in a flash memory for use at a later time. Frequency accuracy of the output waveform is determined by the clock reference. Using the internal TCXO the reference oscillator provides 1ppm accuracy and stability over time and temperature. If higher accuracy and/or stability are required, one may connect an external reference oscillator to the rear panel input and use this input as the reference for the 8102. Frequency may be programmed from the front panel with 11 digits of resolution and with up to 14 digits from an external controller, so using an external reference is recommended, if you intend to utilize the full resolution provided by the instrument. Output amplitude for each of the channels may be programmed separately from 32 mV to 32 Vp-p into an open circuit, and 16 mV to 16 V into 50 Ω. Amplitude and offsets are completely independent to each other and can be programmed with 4 digits of resolution as long as the +8 V and the -8 V rail limitations (double into open circuit) are not exceeded. The amplitude display is calibrated to the load source, which is normally 50 Ω. In cases where the load difference is different, you can customize the instrument to display the correct amplitude reading that matches your load impedance. Besides its normal continuous mode, the Model 8102 responds to a variety of trigger sources. The output waveform may be gated, triggered, or may generate a counted burst of waveforms. A built-in re-trigger generator with a programmable period can be used as a replacement of an external trigger source. Triggers can be delayed to a specific interval by a built-in trigger delay generator that has a range of 200ns to over 20 seconds. The arbitrary waveform memory is comprised of a bank of 16-bit words. Each word represents a point on the horizontal waveform scale. Each word has a horizontal address that can range from 0 to 512k and a vertical address that can range from -32767 to +32768 (16 bits). Using a high speed clocking circuit, the digital contents of the arbitrary waveform memory is extracted and routed to the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). The DAC converts the digital data to an analog signal, and the output amplifier completes the task by amplifying or attenuating the signal at the output connector. There is no need to use the complete memory bank every time an arbitrary waveform is generated. Waveform memory can be divided 1-7 8101/8102 User Manual into many smaller segments and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment. The Tabor Model 8102 can be operated from either GPIB, USB, or LAN interfaces. The product is supplied with IVI.COM driver and ArbConnection software. ArbConnection simulates an array of mechanical front panels with the necessary push buttons, displays and dials to operate the Model 8102 from a remote interface as if it is a bench-top instrument. ArbConnection also allows on-screen creation and editing of complex waveforms and patterns to drive the 8102 various outputs. It is highly recommended that the user become familiar with the 8102 front panel, its basic features, functions and programming concepts as described in this and the following chapters. Safety Considerations The Model 8102 has been manufactured according to international safety standards. The instrument meets EN61010-1 and UL1244 standards for safety of commercial electronic measuring and test equipment for instruments with an exposed metal chassis that is directly connected to earth via the chassis power supply cable. WARNING Do not remove instrument covers when operating the instrument or when the power cord is connected to the mains. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of an opened, powered-on instrument should be avoided as much as possible, but when necessary, should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved. 1-8 Supplied Accessories The instrument is supplied with a CD that includes the User Manual, ArbConnection and IVI engine and driver. Specifications Instrument specifications are listed in Appendix A. These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested. Specifications apply under the following conditions: output terminated into 50Ω after 30 minutes of warm up time, and within a temperature range of 20oC to 30oC. Specifications outside this range are degraded by 0.1% per oC. The instrument is supplied with a power cord and a CD which contains ArbConnection, manual, IVI driver and supporting files. USB and LAN cables and a service manual are available upon request. Getting Started Functional Description 1 Functional Description A detailed functional description is given in the following paragraphs. The description is divided into logical groups: Front panel input and output connectors, rear panel input and output connectors, operating modes, output type, output state and front panel indicators. Front Panel Connectors and Indicators The Model 8102 has 3 BNC connectors on its front panel: two main outputs and one SYNC output. Each connector on the front panel has an LED associated with it, indicating when the output is active (LED on), or when inactive (LED off). The function of each of the front panel connectors is described in the following paragraphs. Main Output Channels 1 and 2 The main output connectors generate fixed (standard) waveforms to 100MHz, user (arbitrary) and modulated waveforms. The arbitrary waveforms are sampled with sampling clock rate to 250 MS/s. CW from the modulated function is programmable to 100 MHz. Output source impedance is 50Ω, hence the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 50Ω load resistance. If the output is connected to a different load resistance, determine the actual amplitude from the following equation: Vout = 2 Vprog ( 50Ω 50Ω+RL ) The output amplitude is doubled when the output impedance is above roughly 10 kΩ. SYNC Output Front Panel Controls The SYNC output generates a single or multiple TTL pulses for synchronizing other instruments (i.e., an oscilloscope) to the output waveform. The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform. The location of the pulse sync along the waveform is programmable. The SYNC output is used as marker output when the 8102 is programmed to one of the modulation functions. The source of the sync can be programmed to source from channel 1 or channel 2. Front panel controls and keys are grouped in logical order to provide efficient and quick access to instrument functions and parameters. Refer to Figure 1-5 throughout the following description to learn the purpose and effect of each front panel control. 1-9 8101/8102 User Manual 11 9 12 8 2 10 3 7 1 4 5 6 Figure 1-5, 8102 Front Panel Controls Note The index in the following paragraphs point to the numbered arrows in Figure 1-5. 1. Power Switch – Toggles 8102 power ON and OFF 2. Menu Top – Selects the root menu. This button is disabled during parameter editing 3. Menu Soft Keys – Soft keys have two functions: 1) Selects output function shape or operating mode, 2) Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing 4. Menu Back – Backs up one menu position. This button is disabled during parameter editing 5. Cancel (Local) – Has two functions: 1) When in edit mode, cancels edit operation and restore last value 2) When operating the 8102 from a remote interface, none of the front panel buttons are active. The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons 6. Enter (Man Trig) – Has two functions: 1) When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen, the cursor and the dial scroll through the 1-10 Getting Started Functional Description 1 parameters. Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit. After the parameter has been modified, the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2) When the 8102 is placed in “Triggered” run mode, the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 8102 7. Cursor UP, Down, Left and Right – Has two functions: 1) When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen, the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2) When parameter is selected for editing, cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly. Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly 8. Dial – Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys 9. Numeral keypad – These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value 10. Parameter Suffixes (M, k, x1 and m) – These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter. They are also used for terminating an edit operation 11. Program CH1, CH2 – Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters. Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters. These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode 12. ON/OFF Output, Sync – These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode. The Output ON/OFF toggles output waveform, at the output connector, ON and OFF. The Sync ON/OFF toggles the sync waveform, at the SYNC output connector, ON and OFF 1-11 8101/8102 User Manual Rear Panel Input & Output Connectors The 8102 has a number of connectors on its rear panel. These connectors are described below. Figure 1-6 shows rear panel plugs, indicators, connectors and other parts. TRIG IN In general, the trigger input is used for stimulating output waveforms at the main output connector(s). The trigger input is inactive when the generator is in continuous operating mode. When placed in trigger, gated or burst mode, the trigger input is made active and waits for the right condition to trigger the instrument. The trigger input is edge sensitive, i.e., it senses transitions from high to low or from low to high. Trigger level and edge sensitivity are programmable for the trigger input. For example, if your trigger signal rides on a dc level, you can offset the trigger level to the same level as your trigger signal, thus assuring correct threshold for the trigger signal. The trigger level is adjustable from -5V to +5V. The trigger input is common to both channels. Therefore, if the 8102 is placed in trigger mode, both channels share the same mode and the trigger input causes both channels to start generating waveforms at the same time. Phase relationship between channels is tightly controlled in trigger mode and therefore, you should expect both channels to start generating waves with exactly the same start phase. Further control of leading edge offset between channels is also provided. The same input is also used in FSK mode, where the output shifts between two frequencies – carrier and shifted frequencies. The output generates carrier frequency when the input signal is false (below trigger level) and shifted frequency when the input is true (above trigger level). Figure 1-6, 8102 Rear Panel 1-12 Getting Started Functional Description 1 REF IN This SMB connector accepts 10MHz, TTL level reference signal. The external reference input is available for those applications requiring better accuracy and stability than what is provided by the 8102. The reference input is active only after selecting the external reference source mode. LAN This RG45 connector accepts standard Ethernet cable. Correct setting of the IP address is required to avoid conflicts with other instruments or equipment on the network. Information how to change IP address and load instrument drivers to the computer is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual. USB This connector accepts standard USB-1 cable. The connection to the host computer is automatic and does not require any address setting from within the 8102. The first time the 8102 is connected to the computer, it will request the driver file. This file is located on the CD which is supplied with the instrument. Information how to install the driver is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual. GPIB This 24-pin connector accepts standard GPIB cable. The GPIB address is configured using the front panel utility menu. The 8102 conforms to the IEEE-488.2 standard. Programming protocol is SCPI version 1993.0. GPIB cables are available separately from your Tabor dealer. AC LINE This 3-prong AC LINE connector accepts ac line voltage. The 8102 senses the line voltage and sets the appropriate range automatically. Therefore, the traditional line voltage selector is not available on the rear panel. To avoid potentially hazardous situations, always connect the center pin to mains ground using the line cord that is supplied with the instrument. AC FUSE The AC fuse protects the 8102 from excessive current. Always replace the fuse with the exact type and rating as printed on the rear panel. If the fuse blows again after replacement, we recommend that you refer your instrument immediately to the nearest Tabor service center. 1-13 8101/8102 User Manual Run Modes The 8102 can be programmed to operate in one of four run modes: Continuous, Triggered, Gated and counted burst. There are two other modes that can operate in conjunction with the basic four run modes, these are: Delayed Trigger and Re-Trigger. The run modes are common to all of the 8102 waveform output however, they may behave differently for arbitrary and for modulated waveforms. For example, the waveform baseline (where the output idles) for arbitrary waveforms in triggered mode is always a dc level but for modulated waveforms you can select from dc level or continuous carrier waveforms. The differences are explained in the relevant sections however, you do have to remember, that after you select the run mode, it affects every waveform output regardless from where you programmed the mode. Summary of run modes and optional trigger sources are listed in Table 1-1. Information in this table also identifies legal run modes and lists possible setting conflicts. Continuous In normal continuous mode, the selected waveform is generated continuously at the selected frequency, amplitude and offset. Only when operated from a remote interface, the output can be toggled on and off using a trigger command. Triggered In triggered mode, the Model 8102 circuits are armed to generate one output waveform. The trigger circuit is sensitive to transitions at the trigger input. Select between positive or negative transitions to trigger the instrument. You may also program the trigger level to the desired threshold level. When triggered, the generator outputs one waveform cycle and remains idle at the last point of the waveform. The Model 8102 can be triggered from a number of sources: 1) Rear panel connector, designated as TRIG IN, 2) Front panel button marked as MAN TRIG (second function to the Enter button), and 3) Bus commands that are applied to the instrument from any interface, LAN, USB or GPIB. Description of the various trigger source options is given in the following paragraphs. The trigger signal, whether it comes from an external source or from an interface command, is routed through some electrical circuits. These circuits cause some small delay known as system delay. System delay cannot be eliminated completely. The system delay is a factor that must be considered when applying a trigger signal. It defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger edge or software 1-14 Getting Started Delayed Trigger 1 command to the instant that the output reacts. Note that there is different behavior of the output in triggered mode for standard, arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform. While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency, the other waveforms idle on dc level only. Burst The burst mode is an extension of the triggered mode where the Model 8102 can be programmed to output a pre-determined number of waveforms. Note that there is different behavior of the output in burst mode for standard, and arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform. While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency, the other waveforms idle on dc level only. Gated In gated mode, the 8102 generates output waveforms between two gating signal. Only hardware triggers can be used to open and close the gate. The gate opens on the first trigger transition and closes on the second transition. Trigger level and trigger slope are programmable. Trigger delay and re-trigger do not apply to the gated run mode. Note that there is different behavior of the output in gated mode for standard, and arbitrary to that of the modulated waveform. While the modulated waveform baseline can be programmed to idle on either dc level or continuous carrier waveform frequency, the other waveforms idle on dc level only. Delayed Trigger The delayed trigger function is exactly the same as the trigger mode except a programmable delay inhibits signal output for a predetermined period after a valid trigger. The delay time defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger (hardware or software) to output. The delay is programmable in steps of 20ns from 200ns to 21 seconds. The trigger delay can be applied to all run modes: continuous, trigger and burst. Re-Trigger The Re-trigger run mode requires only one trigger command to start a sequence of triggered or counted burst of signals. The re-trigger delay defines the time that will lapse from the end of a signal to the start of the next signal. Re-trigger delay is programmable in steps of 20ns from 200ns to 21 seconds. 1-15 8101/8102 User Manual Trigger Source The Model 8102 can be triggered from a number of sources: 1) Rear panel connector, designated as TRIG IN; 2) Front panel button marked as MAN TRIG (second function to the Enter button); and 3) Bus commands that are applied to the instrument from any interface, LAN, USB or GPIB. Description of the various trigger source options is given in the following paragraphs. Summary of trigger options and optional trigger sources are listed in Table 1-2, identifying legal operating modes and listing possible setting conflicts. Table 1-1, Run Modes and Trigger Source Options Summary Run Mode Trigger Option Status Continuous External Bus Mixed Delayed Trigger Re-Trigger Disabled Active(*) Disabled Active Disabled (*) Output signal is toggled on and off using interface triggers Triggered External Bus Mixed Delayed Trigger Re-Trigger Active Active Active Active Active Counted Burst External Bus Mixed Delayed Trigger Re-Trigger Active Active Active(*) Active Active(**) (*) Not in conjunction with Re-Trigger (**) Not in conjunction with Mixed Gated 1-16 External Bus Mixed Delayed Trigger Re-Trigger Active Active Disabled Active Disabled Getting Started Trigger Source 1 External When selecting the External trigger source, the rear panel TRIG IN connector becomes active and every legal signal that is applied to this input is causing the 8102 to trigger. Alternately, if an external signal is not available, the front panel MAN TRIG button may also be used to trigger the instrument. When EXT is selected, triggers commands from a remote interface are ignored. EXT is the default trigger source. Bus When selecting the Bus as a trigger source, the rear panel TRIG IN connector and the front panel MAN TRIG button are disabled and only trigger commands from a remote interface are accepted by the instrument. Make sure that the appropriate trigger source is selected if you mix remote and local operation. Mixed Mixed trigger advance source defines special trigger behavior where the 8102 expects to first receive remote bus trigger and only then accept hardware triggers. The first time that the 8102 is placed in this mode, all EXT (rear and front panel hardware) triggers are ignored until a remote *TRG is issued. Following the first software trigger, subsequent triggers from the remote interface (software) are ignored and only rear and front panel triggers are accepted by the instrument. Table 1-2, Trigger Source Options Summary Trigger Option Source/ Description Status External Interface trigger commands Rear panel TRIG IN connector Front panel MAN TRIG button Disabled Active Active Bus Interface trigger commands Rear panel TRIG IN connector Front panel MAN TRIG button Active Disabled Disabled Mixed Interface trigger commands Rear panel TRIG IN connector Front panel MAN TRIG button (*) First trigger from BUS only, subsequent triggers from EXT only Active(*) Active(*) Active(*) 1-17 8101/8102 User Manual Output Type The Model 8102 can output five types of waveforms: Standard, Arbitrary and Modulated waveforms. The various output types are described in the following paragraphs. Standard Waveforms The 8102 can generate an array of standard waveforms. The waveforms are generated mathematically from standard equations and converted to waveform coordinates that are downloaded to the working memory. Unlike analog function generators that use electrical circuits to produce the wave shapes, the 8102 must compute the waveform coordinates every time a new function is selected or every time the parameters of the function change. The 8102 can produce 11 standard waveforms: sine, triangle, square, ramp and pulse, sinc, gaussian and exponential pulses, dc and Pseudo-random noise. Some of the waveforms parameters can be modified such as start phase for sine and triangle, duty cycle for square, rise and fall times for pulses etc. The standard waveforms are the most commonly used wave shapes and therefore were collected to a library of standard waveforms that can be used without the need to compute and download waveform coordinates. The repetition rate of the standard waveforms is given in units of Hz. Both channels share the same clock source and therefore, when a standard function shape is selected for re-play, the frequency of the waveforms is the same at the output connectors of both channels. Also, when standard waveforms are used, both channels share the same run mode, as well as delayed trigger and re-trigger settings. On the other hand, each channel can have a unique set of waveform, amplitude, offset and waveform parameters without interference between the channels. When both channels are programmed for standard waveforms, the skew between the channels is minimal. Refer to Appendix A for the skew between channels specification. Figure 1-7 shows typical front panel for the standard waveform display and Figure 1-8 shows typical standard waveform panel as displayed when ArbConnection is used for remote programming. 1-18 Getting Started Output Type 1 Figure 1-7, Typical 8102 Standard Waveforms Display Figure 1-8, ArbConnection Example - Typical Standard Waveforms Panel Arbitrary Waveforms One of the main functions of the Tabor model 8102 is generating real-life waveforms. These are normally not sinewaves and squares but user specific waveforms. Generating such waveforms require external utilities such as MatLAB or even spreadsheets but having the program alone is not enough for the 8102; Once the waveform is computed and defined, it must be converted to a format which the instrument can accept and coordinates downloaded to the generator memory for re-play. Arbitrary waveforms are stored as digital XY coordinates in a special memory, normally referred to as working memory. Each coordinate is referred to as waveform point, or waveform sample. The waveform is better defined if it has many waveform points. For 1-19 8101/8102 User Manual example, with only 8 point, sine waveform will hardly resemble the shape of a sinewave and will look more like an up-down staircase, but with 100 points, the same sine waveform will look almost perfect. The final shape of the waveform is produced by a DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) The waveform samples are clocked to the DAC at a rate defined by the sample clock frequency. The output of the DAC converts the digital data to analog levels and passes on the signal to the output amplifier. The shape of the function is more or less the same as it comes out of the DAC except it could be amplified or attenuated, depending on the require amplitude level. The size of the working memory is limited to the way the hardware was designed. The 8102 has 512k points available as standard to build one or more waveforms. There is no need to use the entire memory for only one waveform; The memory can be divided into smaller segments loaded with different waveforms while the instrument can be programmed to output one segment at a time. The Model 8102 has separate arbitrary waveform memories for each channel and each channel can be loaded with different waveforms. Channels are not limited by the number of segments and by the shape of the waveforms. Figure 1-9 shows typical front panel for the arbitrary waveform display and Figure 1-10 shows typical ArbConnection panel as displayed when ArbConnection is used for remote programming. Figure 1-9, Typical 8102 Arbitrary Waveforms Display 1-20 Getting Started Output Type 1 Figure 1-10, ArbConnection Example – Typical Arbitrary Waveforms Panel Modulated Waveforms Using the latest DDS technology, the 8102 is capable of producing an array of modulation, which places this generator in-line with stand-alone, high performance modulation generators. The 8102 can produce: Sweep, FSK, PSK, ASK, AM and FM. When modulation is used from one channel, the other channel is 90° phase shifted, specifically convenient for applications such as I & Q modulation. Figure 1-11 shows a typical front panel entry for modulated waveform and Figure 1-12 shows an ArbConnection example of a modulation panel. Figure 1-11, Typical Modulated waveform Display 1-21 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 1-12, ArbConnection Example – FM Modulation Panel Modulation Off In modulation OFF, the output generates continuous Carrier Waveform frequency. The carrier waveform is sinewave and its frequency can be programmed using the CW Frequency menu. The value programmed for the CW Frequency parameter, is used for all other modulation functions. AM The AM function enables amplitude modulation of a carrier waveform (CW). The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform, normally referred to as envelop waveform. The envelop waveform can be selected from sine, triangle square or ramp shapes. FM The FM function allows frequency modulation of a carrier waveform (CW). The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform, normally referred to as modulating waveform. The modulating waveform can be selected from sine, triangle or square waveforms. FSK FSK (Frequency Shift keying) modulation allows frequency hops between two pre-programmed frequencies: Carrier Waveform Frequency and Shifted Frequency. Note that CW is sinewave only and that the switch between two frequencies is always coherent. 1-22 Getting Started Modulation Run Modes 1 PSK In Phase Shift Keying (PSK), the output of the 8102 hops between two phase settings: start and shifted phase while the frequency of the carrier waveform remain the same. Note that CW is sinewave only. Sweep Sweep modulation allows carrier waveform (CW) to sweep from one frequency, defined by the sweep start parameter to another frequency, defined by the sweep stop parameter. Note that CW is sinewave only. The start and stop frequencies can be programmed throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument. Modulation Run Modes Run modes are shared by all waveforms that are generated by the 8102, including modulation. However, when in modulation function, run mode options take different meaning. When in triggered, burst or gated run modes, the 8102 outputs sine carrier waveform (CW) until a valid trigger is received and then reacts to the trigger. If triggers cease to stimulate the input, the output resumes generating CW frequency only. Carrier frequency is common to all modulation functions and can be programmed from the modulation menus. If the above behavior is not desired, the 8102 can be programmed to output dc level when idle, generate the modulated signal when triggered and then, resume dc level position when the modulation cycle has ended. The baseline option is programmable from either the front panel or from remote. Auxiliary Functions The 8102, besides its standard waveform generation functions, has additional auxiliary function that can transform the instrument to one, stand-alone, full-featured, instrument: Digital Pulse Generator. Operating instructions for the auxiliary function are given in Chapter 3. The following describes this auxiliary function in general. Digital Pulse Generator The digital pulse generator auxiliary function transforms the 8102 into a pulse generator with the capability to generate pulses exactly as they would be generated by a stand-alone pulse generator instrument. When using this function one could program all pulse parameters in timing units. All pulse parameters are programmable including period, pulse width, rise and fall times, delay, polarity and more. Operating instructions for the digital pulse generator are given in Chapter 3. 8102 front panel and ArbConnection control panel examples for the digital pulse generator function are shown in figures 1-13 and 1-14, respectively. 1-23 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 1-13, 8102 Digital Pulse Generator Menu Example Figure 1-14, ArbConnection Digital Pulse Generator Panel Example 1-24 Getting Started Output State 1 Output State The main outputs can be turned on or off. The internal circuit is disconnected from the output connector by a mechanical switch (relay). This feature is useful for connecting the main outputs to an analog bus. For safety reasons, when power is first applied to the chassis, the main output is always off. Customizing the Output Units There are some parameters that could be customized for easier fit of the output; These are: horizontal time units, load impedance, 10 MHz reference source and sample clock source. Information on the customization options is given in chapter 3. Programming the Model 8102 All instrument functions, parameters, and modes can be accessed through remote commands. There are a number of ways to “talk” to the instrument. They all require that an appropriate software driver be installed in the host computer; the rest is a matter of practice and knowledge of the language in use. There are other system considerations like address selection that have to be settled before programming the instrument. These topics are discussed in later chapters. Low level programming of the Model 8102 is done using SCPI commands. Programming aspects are covered in Chapters 4. High level drivers like IVI drivers are beyond the scope of this manual. Contact your Tabor representative for more information about high level drivers for the Model 8102. 1-25 8101/8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank. 1-26 Chapter 2 Configuring the Instrument Title Page Installation Overview............................................................................................................ 2-2 Unpacking and Initial Inspection .......................................................................................... 2-2 Safety Precautions............................................................................................................... 2-2 Performance Checks ........................................................................................................... 2-2 Power Requirements ........................................................................................................... 2-3 Grounding Requirements..................................................................................................... 2-3 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment ............................................................. 2-3 Preparation for Use.............................................................................................................. 2-4 Installation............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Installing Software Utilities ................................................................................................... 2-4 Controlling the Instrument from Remote .............................................................................. 2-5 Connecting to a Remote interface ....................................................................................... 2-5 Selecting a Remote interface............................................................................................... 2-6 GPIB Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2-7 USB Configuration............................................................................................................ 2-8 LAN Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2-14 Choosing a Static IP Address ....................................................................................... 2-16 8101/8102 User Manual Installation Overview This chapter contains information and instructions necessary to prepare the Model 8102 for operation. Details are provided for initial inspection, grounding safety requirements, repackaging instructions for storage or shipment, installation information and Ethernet address configuration. Unpacking and Initial Inspection Unpacking and handling of the generator requires normal precautions and procedures applicable to handling of sensitive electronic equipment. The contents of all shipping containers should be checked for included accessories and certified against the packing slip to determine that the shipment is complete. Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product. Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non-hazardous voltages, there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present. CAUTION This product is intended for use by qualified persons who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury. Read the operating information carefully before using the product. Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present. Lethal voltage may be present on power cables, connector jacks, or test fixtures. The American National Standard Institute (ANSI) states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS, 42.4V peak or 60 VDC are present. When using test fixtures, keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test. Carefully read the Safety Precautions instructions that are supplied with your test fixtures. Before performing any maintenance, disconnect the line cord and all test cables. Only qualified service personnel should perform maintenance. Performance Checks 2-2 The instrument has been inspected for mechanical and electrical performance before shipment from the factory. It is free of physical defects and in perfect electrical order. Check the instrument for damage in transit and perform the electrical procedures outlined in the section entitled Unpacking and Initial Inspection. Configuring the Instrument Power Requirements Power Requirements 2 The function generator may be operated from a wide range of mains voltage 85 to 265 Vac. Voltage selection is automatic and does not require switch setting. The instrument operates over the power mains frequency range of 48 to 63Hz. Always verify that the operating power mains voltage is the same as that specified on the rear panel. The 8102 should be operated from a power source with its neutral at or near ground (earth potential). The instrument is not intended for operation from two phases of a multi-phase ac system or across the legs of a single-phase, three-wire ac power system. Crest factor (ratio of peak voltage to rms.) should be typically within the range of 1.3 to 1.6 at 10% of the nominal rms. mains voltage. Grounding Requirements To ensure the safety of operating personnel, the U.S. O.S.H.A. (Occupational Safety and Health) requirement and good engineering practice mandate that the instrument panel and enclosure be “earth” grounded. Although BNC housings are isolated from the front panel, the metal part is connected to earth ground. WARNING Do not attempt to float the output from ground as it may damage the Model 8102 and your equipment. Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time or shipped to a service center, proceed as directed below. If repacking procedures are not clear to you or, if you have questions, contact your nearest Tabor Electronics Representative, or the Tabor Electronics Customer Service Department. 1. Repack the instrument using the wrappings, packing material and accessories originally shipped with the unit. If the original container is not available, purchase replacement materials. 2. Be sure the carton is well sealed with strong tape or metal straps. 3. Mark the carton with the model and serial number. If it is to be shipped, show sending and return address on two sides of the box. 2-3 8101/8102 User Manual NOTE If the instrument is to be shipped to Tabor Electronics for calibration or repair, attach a tag to the instrument identifying the owner. Note the problem, symptoms, and service or repair desired. Record the model and serial number of the instrument. Show the RMA (Returned Materials Authorization) order as well as the date and method of shipment. ALWAYS OBTAIN AN RMA NUMBER FROM THE FACTORY BEFORE SHIPPING THE 8102 TO TABOR ELECTRONICS. Preparation for Use Preparation for use includes removing the instrument from the container box, installing the software and connecting the cables to its input and output connectors. Installation If this instrument is intended to be installed in a rack, it must be installed in a way that clears air passage to its cooling fans. For inspection and normal bench operation, place the instrument on the bench in such a way that will clear any obstructions to its rear fan to ensure proper airflow. CAUTION Using the 8102 without proper airflow will result in damage to the instrument. Installing Software Utilities The 8102 is supplied with a CD that contains the following programs: IVI Driver, ArbConnection, USB driver and some other utilities to aid you with the operation of the instrument. For bench operation, all that you need from the CD is this manual however, it is recommended that you stow away the CD in a safe place in case you’ll want to use the 8102 from a host computer or in a system. The IVI driver is a useful utility that provides standard communication and commands structure to control the 8102 from remote. Programming examples are also available to expedite your software development. The IVI driver comes free with the 8102 however, you’ll need the IVI engine and visa32.dll run time utilities to be able to use the IVI driver. The additional utilities can be downloaded for free from NI’s (National instrument) web site – www.ni.com. ArbConnection is a user friendly program that lets you control 2-4 Configuring the Instrument Controlling the Instrument from Remote 2 instruments functions and features from a remote computer. It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms on the screen, build sequence tables, modulating signals and much more and then download the signals to your 8102 without the hustle of writing complex programs and utilities. This is also a great tool for you to experiment simple, or complex command string to gain experience before you write your own code. ArbConnection has a command editor feature that allows direct low-level programming of the 8102 using SCPI commands, just as you will be using them in your program. Installation of ArbConnection is simple and intuitive and only requires that visa32.dll runtime file be added to your Windows system folder. Download the file from NI’s (National instrument) web site – www.ni.com. Installation and operating instruction for ArbConnection are given in Chapter 4. The USB driver is required if you intend to connect the 8102 to a host computer on a USB bus. Information how to connect the USB cable and how to load the software is given in this chapter. Controlling the Instrument from Remote In general, the 8102 can be controlled from remote using one of the following interfaces: USB, Ethernet and GPIB. Remote interface cables are not supplied with the instrument so if you plan on using one of the remote programming option, make sure you have a suitable cable to connect to your host computer. The following paragraphs describe how to connect and configure the 8102 to operate from remote. The description is given for computers fitted with Windows XP but little changes will show while installing software on different Windows versions. Connecting to a Remote interface You can connect your Tabor 8102 to GPIB, USB, or LAN adapters, depending on your application and requirements from your system. Installing interface adapters in your computer will not be described in this manual since the installation procedures for these adapters change frequently. You must follow the instructions supplied with your particular adapter. Before proceed with the remote interface installation, install an adapter card and follow the instructions in the following paragraphs. GPIB Connection Direct connection between a host computer and a single device with GPIB is not recommended since GPIB adapter is usually expensive and is not really required for direct connection. Use GPIB connection in cases where download speed is critical to the system or when you already have GPIB system in place and you are adding the 8102 as a GPIB device. The GPIB port is connected with a special 24-wire cable. Refer interconnection issues to your GPIB supplier. After you connect the 8102 to the GPIB port, proceed to the GPIB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to select a GPIB address. 2-5 8101/8102 User Manual USB Connection Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with USB is most recommended as this does not require any specific considerations and device configuration. Just connect your Tabor 8102 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure. After you connect the 8102 to the USB port, proceed to the USB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to install the USB driver. LAN Connection Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with 10/100 BaseT is possible, but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines crossed. If your site is already wired connect the 8102 via twisted pair Ethernet cable. Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10/100 BaseT network use (phone cables will not work). Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator. After you connect the 8102 to the LAN port, proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to set up LAN parameters. Selecting a Remote interface The 8102 is supplied by the factory with the active remote interface set to USB. If you intend to use USB connection, then all you need to do is connect your USB cable and proceed with the USB Configuration instructions as given in this chapter to install the USB driver and to configure the USB port (first connection only). If you already used your instrument in various platforms and want to reselect your interface To select an active Interface, you need to access the Select Interface screen as shown in Figure 2-1. To access this screen press the TOP menu button, then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key. The Select Interface soft key will update the display with the interface parameters. Use the curser keys left and right to point to the required interface option then press Enter. The new interface will Initialize and the icon at the top will be updated and will flag the active interface option. The interface icon is always displayed at the top of the screen so if you are not sure which of the interfaces is selected, compare the following icons to what you have on the screen: Designates GPIB interface is selected and active. GPIB configuration is required to communicate with your PC. Designates USB interface is selected and active. First connection requires USB configuration and software driver installation to communicate with your PC. 2-6 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 Designates LAN interface is selected and active. LAN configuration is required to communicate with your PC. Figure 2-1, Selecting a Remote interface GPIB Configuration GPIB configuration requires an address setting only. If you intend to use more than one instrument on the bus, you have to make sure each device has a unique address setting. GPIB address is programmed from the front panel Utility menu as shown in Figure 22. To access this screen press the TOP menu button, then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key. The GPIB soft key will update the display with the GPIB address parameter. The default address is 4. To modify the address, press the Enter key and use the dial or keypad to select the new address. Press Enter for the 8102 to accept the new address setting. Note Configuring your GPIB address setting does not automatically select the GPIB as your active remote interface. Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu. Information how to select and Interface is given hereinbefore. 2-7 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 2-2, GPIB Configuration Screen USB Configuration 2-8 The USB requires no front panel configuration parameters. Following simple installation steps as shown later, just connect your Tabor 8102 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure. The first time you connect the generator to your PC, the new hardware will be detected and the message as shown in Figure 2-3 will appear: Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 Figure 2-3, USB Device Detected Figure 2-4, Found New Hardware Wizard Immediately thereafter, the Found New Hardware Wizard will open, as shown in Figure 2-4. Select the Install from a list or specific Location option and click on next. At this time insert the installation CD into your CD driver. If you know the logical letter for your CD drive, type in the information in the path field. If you are not sure where this driver is, click on the Browse button and look for the path. Check the appropriate controls as shown in Figure 2-5 and then click on Next. With Service Pack 2 only, you’ll be prompted with a Windows Logo Warning message, as shown in figure 2-6, advising you that the software has not been verified for its compatibility with Windows XP. Click on Continue Anyway. To complete the process press on Finish, as shown in Figure 2-7. 2-9 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 2-5, Choose Your Search and installation Options Figure 2-6, Windows Logo Warning Message 2-10 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 Figure 2-7, New Hardware Found and Software installed Figure 2-7 shows that the Tabor 8102 USB Waveform Generator has been found and software driver installed. However, the process does not end at this point but continues to assign a logical port address to the USB driver. After you click on Finish, the Found New Hardware message appears however, this time it has found a USB serial port, as shown in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8, Found New Hardware - USB Serial Port Proceed with the installation till a logical drive is assigned to the USB port. The process is very similar to what you have done before, just select the path and options in the next dialog box and click on Next as shown in Figure 2-9. With Service Pack 2 only, you’ll be prompted with a Windows Logo Warning message, as shown in figure 2-10, advising you that the software has not been verified for its compatibility with Windows XP. Click on Continue Anyway. To complete the process click on Finish, as shown in Figure 2-11. 2-11 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 2-9, Choose Your Search and installation Options Figure 2-10, Windows Logo Warning Message 2-12 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 Figure 2-11, New Hardware Found and Software installed The process above detected a USB device and installed the software for it, then it has assigned a Serial Port address to the USB post. In fact, this ends the process unless you want to verify that the drivers and the port are correctly assigned on your PC. To make sure your USB port and the Tabor 8102 configured correctly, compare your Device Manager to the example in Figure 2-12. Note Configuring your USB setting does not automatically select the USB as your active remote interface. Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu. Information how to select and Interface is given hereinbefore. 2-13 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 2-12, Model 8102 Configured for USB Operation LAN Configuration There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish network communications using the LAN interface. Primarily you’ll need to establish an IP address. You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface. To change LAN configuration, you need to access the LAN 10/100 screen as shown in Figure 2-13. To access this screen press the TOP menu button, then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key. The LAN 10/100 soft key will update the display with the LAN parameters. Note there are some parameters that are shown on the display that cannot be accessed or modified; These are: Physical Address and Host Name. These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for product. The only parameters that can be modified are the IP 2-14 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 Address, the Subnet mask and the Default gateway. Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN network. Description of the LAN settings and information how to change them is given in the following. Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface. Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu. Information how to select and Interface is given herinbefore. Figure 2-13, LAN Configuration Screen There are three LAN parameters in this screen that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting; These are described below. Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application. • IP address - The unique, computer-readable address of a device on your network. An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods (for example, 192.160.0.233). Refer to the next section - Choosing a Static IP Address. • Subnet mask - A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network. • Gateway IP - The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway, which is a connection between two networks. If your network does not have a gateway, set this parameter to 0.0.0.0. 2-15 8101/8102 User Manual Choosing a Static IP Address For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator If you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network, you must choose IP addresses carefully. Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device. Also have the network administrator assign the proper subnet mask and gateway IP. For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network, you can choose your own IP addresses. The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask. You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device. If your subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same. If your subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, only the first two numbers in the IP addresses on the network must match. For either subnet mask, numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address. Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address, but this number must be the same as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Table 2-1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255.255.255.0. All valid IP addresses contain the same first three numbers. The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only. If you are setting up your own network, you probably do not have a gateway, so you should set these values to 0.0.0.0. Table 2-1, Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 IP Address 2-16 Comment 123.234.45.211 Valid. 123.234.45.213 Valid. The first three numbers match the previous IP address. The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254. 123.202.45.214 Invalid. Second number does not match the previous IP addresses. The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255.255.255.0. 123.234.45.0 Invalid. The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0. 123.234.45.255 Invalid. The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255. Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface 2 TIP To find out the network settings for your computer, perform the following steps: • For Windows 98/Me/2000/XP 1. Open a DOS prompt. 2. Type IPCONFIG. 3. Press <Enter>. If you need more information, you can run ipconfig with the /all option by typing IPCONFIG /all at the DOS prompt. This shows you all of the settings for the computer. Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device. • For Windows 95 1. Open a DOS prompt. 2. Type WINIPCFG. 3. Press <Enter>. Select the Ethernet adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the dropdown list. 2-17 8101/8102 User Manual This page intentionally left blank 2-18 Chapter 3 Using the Instrument Title Page Overview .............................................................................................................................. 3-3 Inter-Channel Dependency .................................................................................................. 3-3 Inter-Channel Phase Dependency ................................................................................3-3 Output Termination .............................................................................................................. 3-3 Input / Output Protection ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Power On/Reset Defaults .................................................................................................... 3-4 Controlling the 8102............................................................................................................. 3-6 8102 Front Panel Menus...................................................................................................... 3-7 Enabling the Outputs ......................................................................................................... 3-11 Selecting a Waveform Type............................................................................................... 3-12 Changing the Output Frequency........................................................................................ 3-13 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency ............................................................................ 3-14 Programming the Amplitude and Offset............................................................................. 3-15 Selecting a Run Mode........................................................................................................ 3-17 Selecting the Modulation Run Modes ................................................................................ 3-18 Triggered Mode ...........................................................................................................3-18 Delayed Trigger ...........................................................................................................3-19 Re-Trigger....................................................................................................................3-19 Gated Mode .................................................................................................................3-20 Burst Mode ..................................................................................................................3-21 Using the Manual Trigger................................................................................................... 3-22 Using the SYNC Output ..................................................................................................... 3-22 Applying Filters .................................................................................................................. 3-23 Generating Standard Waveforms ...................................................................................... 3-24 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ....................................................................................... 3-34 What Are Arbitrary Waveforms?..................................................................................3-35 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms .................................................................................3-35 Generating Modulated Waveforms .................................................................................... 3-37 Off ................................................................................................................................3-38 3-1 8101/8102 User Manual AM ...............................................................................................................................3-39 FM ...............................................................................................................................3-41 FSK..............................................................................................................................3-42 PSK .............................................................................................................................3-44 Sweep..........................................................................................................................3-46 Using the Auxiliary Functions............................................................................................. 3-47 Using the Digital Pulse Generator ...............................................................................3-47 Pulse Generator Menus...........................................................................................3-50 Pulse Design Limitations.................................................................................................... 3-52 Understanding the Basics of Phase Offset between Channels ..................................3-53 Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard Waveforms....................................................3-54 Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary Waveforms.....................................................3-56 Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated Waveforms..................................................3-56 Customizing the Output Units ............................................................................................ 3-56 Selecting the Horizontal Units .....................................................................................3-56 Adjusting Load Impedance..........................................................................................3-57 Monitoring the Internal Temperature.................................................................................. 3-57 3-2 Using the Instrument Overview Overview 3 This chapter contains information about how to operate the Tabor 8102. Operation is divided into two general categories: basic bench operation, and remote operation (GPIB, USB and ENET). Basic bench operation, which is covered in this section, describes how to operate the arbitrary waveform generator using front panel sequences. The 8102 is supplied with ArbConnection, a PC based software package with a graphical user interface to allow users to program all of the functions directly. LabView drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available for more experienced programmers. The following paragraphs describe the various modes of operation and give examples of how to program the Model 8102. The manual is organized by instrument function and instructions are given in each paragraph on how to use the function from both the front panel and ArbConnection. Inter-Channel Dependency Inter-Channel Phase Dependency Output Termination The 8102 has two output channels. Although this is a two-channel instrument, many of the commands that set parameters and functions are common for both channels. For example, sample clock and run modes can not be set separately for each channel. On the other hand, you may program each channel to have different function shape, amplitude and offset. Table 3-1 lists the function and parameters and their related Inter-channel dependency. The 8102 has only one sample clock source, which means that waveform samples are clocked simultaneously on both channels. Therefore, if you are looking to have to completely separated channels, with no correlation between the two signals, this is not the right instrument for you. However, most applications for two channel generator require phase correlation between the channels and this is the way the 8102 is constructed. Shared sample clock source assures that both channels start generating signals exactly on the same phase and, in addition, there is an assurance that there is no jitter between the two channels. Inter-channel phase control is described later in this chapter, in the Using the Auxiliary Functions section. During use, output connectors must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to impedance mismatch. Proper termination is also required for accurate amplitude levels at the output connectors. Use 50Ω cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors. Always place the 50 Ω termination at the far end of the cables. Note that the display reading of the amplitude level is calibrated to 3-3 8101/8102 User Manual show the actual level on the load when the load impedance is exactly 50 Ω. There are cases however, where the load has different impedance so, in that case, the display reading will indicate a different reading than the actual amplitude level on the load. The 8102 provides a customization menu where the load impedance can be changed from 50 Ω to other values. Information how to customize the 8102 is given later in this chapter. Input / Output Protection The Model 8102 provides protection for internal circuitry connected to input and output connectors. Refer to the specifications in Appendix A to determine the level of protection associated with each input or output connector. WARNING The outputs can only be connected to resistive loads. Connecting the 8102 to inductive or capacitive load may damage the output and void the warranty on the instrument. Power On/Reset Defaults The 8102 utilizes non-volatile memory backup that automatically stores the last setup before the generator has been turned off. Every time you turn on the instrument, the non-volatile memory updates the front panel setting with modes, parameters and waveforms from its last setting with only one exception, for safety reasons, the outputs remain off even if they were turned on before powering down the 8102. After power on, the instrument displays information messages and updates the display with the last setup information. The 8102 can always be reset to its default values; Information on how to restore default parameters is given below. If you are not yet fully familiar with front panel operation of the 8102, you may find yourself locked into a "dead-end" situation where nothing operates the way it should. The fastest way to restore the generator to a known state is by resetting the instrument to factory defaults. Observe Figure 3-1 and reset parameters to factory defaults as follows: 1. Press the Utilities soft key 2. Scroll down to the, or 3. Press button 3 to restore factory defaults Table 3-1 summarizes factory defaults for the most common parameters. A complete list of all parameters, their defaults, as well as their maximum and minimum values is given in Chapter 4. 3-4 Using the Instrument Power On/Reset Defaults 3 Figure -1, Reset 8102 to Factory Defaults Table -1, Default Conditions After Reset Function / Parameter Default Inter-Channel Dependency Outputs State: Off Separate SYNC State: Off Common Operating Mode: Continuous Common Active Channel: 1 Separate Output Function: Standard Separate Output Function Shape: Sine Separate Standard Wave Frequency: 1MHz Common User Wave Sample Clock: 10MS/s Common Sample Clock Source & Reference: Internal Common Amplitude: 5V Separate Offset: 0V Separate Filter State: Off Separate Filter Type: Auto Separate Trigger Slope: Positive Common Trigger Level: 1.6V Common Trigger Source: External Common Trigger Delay: Off Common Re-Trigger: Off Common Modulation State: Off Common 3-5 8101/8102 User Manual Controlling the 8102 Controlling 8102 function, modes and parameters is simply a matter of pressing once or twice the appropriate button as described in the following paragraphs. Refer to Figure 3-2 throughout this description. 1. Power Switch – Toggles 8102 power ON and OFF 2. Menu Top – Selects the root menu. This button is disabled during parameter editing 3. Menu Soft Keys – Soft keys have two functions: 1) Selects output function shape or operating mode, 2) Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing 4. Menu Back – Backs up one menu position. This button is disabled during parameter editing 5. Cancel (Local) – Has two functions: 1) When in edit mode, cancels edit operation and restore last value 2) When operating the 8102 from a remote interface, none of the front panel buttons are active. The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons 9 2 11 12 8 A 10 B C 3 7 D 1 4 Figure -2, 8102 Front Panel Operation 3-6 5 6 Using the Instrument 8102 Front Panel Menus 3 6. Enter (MAN TRIG) – Has two functions: 1) When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen, the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters. Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit. After the parameter has been modified, the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2) When the 8102 is placed in “Triggered” run mode, the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 8102 7. Cursor UP, Down, Left and Right – Has two functions: 1) When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen, the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2) When parameter is selected for editing, cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly. Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly 8. Dial – Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys 9. Numeral keypad – These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value 10. Parameter Suffixes (M, k, x1 and m) – These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter. They are also used for terminating an edit operation 11. Program CH1, CH2 – Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters. Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters. These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode 12. ON/OFF Output, Sync – These keys can be used only when the 8102 is not in edit mode. The Output ON/OFF toggles output waveform, at the output connector, ON and OFF. The Sync ON/OFF toggles the sync waveform, at the SYNC output connector, ON and OFF 8102 Front Panel Menus The 8102 has over 300 parameters that control functions, modes, waveforms and auxiliary functions. Due to the complexity of the product, the functions were divided to logical groups and subgroups and access to these groups is provided using the soft key menus. There are five main menus, of which can be accessed after pressing the TOP soft key; These are shown in Figure 3-1 and are mark as item 3 (A, B, C and D). The main menus are Waveform, Run Mode, Utility, Outputs and Auxiliary. Each main menu provides access to sub-menus as summarized in Tables 3-2 to 3-5. Note that the description in these tables is given for general understanding of what is available in terms of operating the instrument. For detailed instructions, check the appropriate section of the manual. 3-7 8101/8102 User Manual Table -2, Front Panel Waveform Menus Soft Key A A A B C D ↓D (*) ↓D B A B C D ↓D ↓D D A 3-8 TOP Menu Waveform 2nd Level Menu 3rd Level Menu Notes Provides access to initial selection of the waveform type. Selects from Standard, Arbitrary, Sequenced and Modulated Standard Wave Shape Frequency Amplitude Offset Phase Reset Parameters Select from a wave shapes list Programs standard waveform frequency Programs output amplitude Programs output amplitude offset Parameters depend on selected shape Resets parameters for this waveform only Sample Clock Amplitude Offset Active Segment Wave Composer Delete Segments Programs sample clock frequency Programs output amplitude Programs output amplitude offset Selects the active arbitrary waveform segment Provides access to the waveform composer Off Modulation Type B C D B C D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D B C D Off Off AM AM AM AM AM AM AM FM FM FM FM ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D B C D FM FM FM FM Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep CW Frequency Amplitude Offset Modulation Shape Modulation Depth Modulation Freq CW Frequency Trigger Baseline Amplitude Offset Modulation Shape CW Frequency Frequency Deviation Modulation Freq Marker Trigger Baseline Amplitude Offset Sweep Type Direction Start Frequency Selects from Off, AM, FM, FSK, PSK and Sweep Programs the carrier waveform frequency Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset Programs the modulating waveform shape Parameter modulation depth Parameter envelop frequency Programs the carrier waveform frequency Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset Programs the modulating waveform shape Programs the carrier waveform frequency Programs FM deviation frequency Arbitrary Modulated Parameter modulation frequency Programs the marker frequency Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset Selects from linear or logarithmic Selects from up or down Programs the start frequency Using the Instrument 8102 Front Panel Menus 3 Table -2, Front Panel Waveform Menus (continued) Soft Key ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D B C D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D B C D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D Modulation Option Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep FSK FSK FSK FSK FSK FSK FSK FSK PSK 2nd Level Menu PSK PSK PSK PSK PSK PSK PSK PSK PSK 3rd Level Menu Stop Frequency Sweep Time Marker Trigger Baseline Amplitude Offset FSK Data CW Frequency Shifted Frequency Baud Marker Trigger Baseline Amplitude Offset PSK Type PSK Data CW Frequency Start Phase Shifted Phase Baud Marker Trigger Baseline Amplitude Offset Notes Programs the stop frequency Programs the sweep time Programs the marker frequency Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset Displays and edits FSK data table Programs the carrier waveform frequency Programs the shifted frequency Programs the baud frequency Programs the marker position Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset Programs the PSK type: PSK, BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, pi/4DQPSK, 8PSK and 16PSK Displays and edits PSK data table Programs the carrier waveform frequency Programs the start phase Programs the shifted phase Programs the baud frequency Programs the marker position Programs the baseline wave in triggered mode Programs the CW Amplitude Programs the CW amplitude offset (*) ↓D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu. Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial. Table -3, Front Panel Run Mode Menus Soft Key B TOP Menu Run Mode 2nd Level Menu A B Continuous Triggered C Gated D Burst 3rd Level Menu Notes Provides access to 8102 Run Mode options: Continuous, Triggered, Gated and Counted Burst Selects the continuous run mode Selects the triggered run mode. Provides access to trigger parameters, re-trigger on/off and re-trigger parameters Selects the gated run mode. Provides access to gating parameters Selects the triggered run mode. Provides access to counted burst parameters, re-trigger on/off and re-trigger parameters (*) ↓D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu. Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial. 3-9 8101/8102 User Manual Table -4, Front Panel Utility and Output Menus Soft Key C TOP Menu Utility 2nd Level Menu 3rd Level Menu Factory Reset Customize System Remote Setup A B C D D Select interface GPIB USB LAN Outputs Notes Provides access to factory reset, display customization, remote setup and system parameters Allows reset of all 8102 parameters to factory default values Provides access to display customization: horizontal units, clock sources, load impedance, dial direction and display brightness Displays all 8102 system parameters, including serial number, installed option, last calibration date. Also monitors internal temperature rise. Provides access to selecting the remote interface. Available interfaces are LAN, USB and GPIB Selects between GPIB, USB and LAN Programs GPIB address Display information on the USB ID Programs LAN IP address Provides access to output on/off control, filter on/off and type, SYNC output on/off control and properties, and start phase offset between channels. Table -5, Front Panel Auxiliary Menus Soft Key ↓D A B C D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D ↓D TOP Menu Auxiliary Auxiliary Function 2nd Level Menu Pulse Generator Apply Changes Period Delay Rise Time High Time Fall Time High Level Low Level Polarity Double State Channel State Sync Position Notes Provides access to the following auxiliary function: Digital Pulse Generator Press this button to accept modifications of pulse parameters. Programs the period of the pulse Programs the delay from the start of the pulse Programs the pulse rise time parameter Programs the pulse high time parameter Programs the pulse fall time parameter Programs the pulse high level parameter Programs the pulse low level parameter Programs the pulse polarity parameter Toggles double pulse state on and off Programs the channel programmability state Programs the sync pulse position parameter (*) ↓D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu. Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial. 3-10 Using the Instrument Enabling the Outputs Enabling the Outputs 3 For safety reasons, main outputs default setting is OFF. The outputs can be turned on and off using either the hot keys, or the Output Menu. Observe Figure 3-3 and disable or enable the main outputs using the procedure below. The same procedure can be used for enabling and disabling the SYNC output. The numbers on Figure 3-3 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description. 1. While not editing any parameter, select the channel you want to turn on using the PROGRAM CH1 or CH2 keys 2. Press ON/OFF OUTPUT or SYNC to toggle main and sync output on and off 1 2 3 5, 7 4 Figure 3-3, Enabling and Disabling the Outputs 6, 8 Alternately, the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu. Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state: 3. Press TOP to display the root menu 4. Press Outputs to open the Outputs dialog box as shown in Figure 3-3 5. Use the dial or arrow keys to access the required field. Focus is on a filed that is painted orange. 6. To edit the field press Enter. The edited field will turn white with orange borders 7. Use the dial or arrow keys to change the field 8. Press Enter again to lock in the setting 3-11 8101/8102 User Manual Selecting a Waveform Type There are four main types of waveforms that the 8102 can produce: Standard, Arbitrary and Modulated waveforms. Standard and modulated waveforms are computed from equations and tables that are built into the program. The instrument can output arbitrary waveforms however, only after waveform data has been downloaded into its memory. Refer to Figure 3-4 and use the following procedure to select an output type. Note that there are sub-menus associated with each output type menu. Accessing and using these sub-menus is described later in this chapter. The numbers on Figure 3-4 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description. 1 2 3 Figure 3-4, Selecting an Output Waveform Type Alternately, the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu. Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state: 1. Press TOP to display the root menu 2. Press Waveforms, the display as shown in Figure 3-4 will open. 3. Press one of the soft keys to select the required waveform. Note the waveform screen shows a sine waveform. The sine is the default waveform. After you select a different waveform type, the screen will be updated with a new symbol, which is associated with the new type. Note The picture in the 8102 LCD display is an icon only. The actual output waveform may look entirely different. 3-12 Using the Instrument Changing the Output Frequency Changing the Output Frequency 3 You should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency. The waveform frequency parameter is valid for standard waveforms only and controls waveform frequency at the output connector; The sample clock frequency parameter is valid for arbitrary waveforms only and defines the frequency of which the generator clocks data points. Standard waveform frequency is measured in units of Hz. Arbitrary waveform sample clock frequency is measured in units of S/s (samples per second). The frequency of a given arbitrary waveform at the output connector is dependant on sample clock frequency, the number of data points, and other specific waveform definitions. The frequency of the output waveform will change only if a standard waveform is generated. First select a standard waveform as described earlier and then proceed with frequency modification. Observe Figure 3-5 and modify frequency using the following procedure. The index numbers in Figure 3-5 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description. 1. Press the Frequency soft key to select the frequency parameter 2. Use the numeric keypad to program the new frequency value 3. Press M, k, x1 or m to terminate the modification process Alternately, you can modify the frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only. 2 3 1 Figure 3-5, Modifying Output Frequency 3-13 8101/8102 User Manual Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the frequency parameter, the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter. The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter. If you choose to leave the old value, press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Changing the Sample Clock Frequency The frequency of the sample clock will affect the output waveform only if arbitrary waveforms are generated. First select an arbitrary waveform as described earlier and then proceed with sample clock frequency modification. Observe Figure 3-6 and modify the sample clock using the following procedure. The index numbers in Figure 3-6 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description. 2 1 3 Figure 3-6, Modifying Sample Clock Frequency 1. Press the Frequency soft key to select the Sample Clock parameter 2. Use the numeric keypad to dial the new sample clock frequency value 3. Press “M” for MHz, “k” for kHz, “x1” for Hz, or “m” for mHz to terminate the modification process Alternately, you can modify the sample clock frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only. 3-14 Using the Instrument Programming the Amplitude and Offset 3 Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the sample clock frequency parameter, the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter. The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter. If you choose to leave the old value, press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Programming the Amplitude and Offset Output amplitude and offset can be programmed independently and separately for each channel. Amplitude and offset are set within windows, so before you select values for these parameters, make sure you do not exceed the limits. Amplitude and offset can be programmed independently as long as the following relationship between the two values is not exceeded: Window ≥ Amplitude + Offset 2 The first thing you do before you program amplitude and offset setting is define which of the channels is being programmed. The active channel is displayed at the upper right corner of the LCD display. When the display shows at the upper right corner, you are currently programming channel 1 parameters. Keypads “1” and “2” are used as hot keys for channel selection. While not editing any parameter, press key “2” to program channel 2 parameters. When the display shows at the upper right corner, you can proceed with channel 2 programming. The amplitude and offset parameters are duplicated in multiple screens however, when changed for a specific function shape, the new value is updated on all screens for all other function shapes. Refer to Figure 3-7 and modify amplitude and offset using the procedure as described below. The index numbers in Figure 3-7 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the Amplitude soft key button Press Enter to edit the Amplitude value Use the numeric keypad to program the new value Press “m” for mV, or “x1” for volts to select the suffix letter. Press Enter to lock in the value 3-15 8101/8102 User Manual Alternately, you can modify the amplitude value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter. Offset is programmed the same way as amplitude except select Offset from the soft key menus to access the offset parameter. Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the amplitude or offset parameters, the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter. The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter. If you choose to leave the old value, press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter 4 5 1 3, 6 Figure -7, Programming Amplitude and Offset 3-16 Using the Instrument Selecting a Run Mode Selecting a Run Mode 3 The Model 8102 offers four run modes: Continuous, Triggered, Gated and Burst. The selected waveform is repeated continuously when the instrument is set to operate in Continuous mode. The continuous output can be turned on and off from a remote interface, and thus controlling the start and stop of the waveform from an external source. The operating mode defaults to continuous after reset. Triggered, Gated, and Burst modes require an external signal to initiate output cycles. In some case, an internal trigger generator is available to generate the required trigger stimuli without the need to connect to external devices. Figure 3-8 show the run mode options. Press one of the soft keys in the left to select the required run mode. Description of the various run modes and the parameters that are associated with each run mode is given in the following paragraphs. 2, 4 1 Figure -8, Run Mode Options 3, 5 Note Burst run mode is shown in Figure 3-8 as an example however, the following description applies to all Run Mode menus. In general, a specific run mode is selected from the Run Mode soft key menu. The screen as shown in Figure 3-8 is displayed. Proceed to select the run mode and to program parameters as follows: 1. Press one of the soft keys to select from: Continuous, Triggered, Gated or burst. The output will immediately be updated with the selected run mode 2. Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll down to the parameter field you want to modify 3-17 8101/8102 User Manual 3. Press Enter to edit the Divider value 4. Use the arrow keys or the dial to modify the edited parameter 5. Press Enter to lock in the value Selecting the Modulation Run Modes The 8102 run modes are shared by all waveform type: Standard, Arbitrary and Modulated. However, when in modulation function, run mode options take different meaning. When in triggered, burst or gated run modes, the 8102 outputs sine carrier waveform (CW) until a valid trigger is received and then reacts to the trigger. If triggers cease to stimulate the input, the output resumes generating CW frequency only. Carrier frequency is common to all modulation functions and can be programmed from the modulation menus. If the above behavior is not desired, the 8102 can be programmed to output dc level when idle, generate the modulated signal when triggered and then, resume dc level position when the modulation cycle has ended. The baseline option is programmable from either the front panel or from remote. Triggered Mode In Triggered mode, the output remains at a DC level as long as a valid trigger signal has not occurred. Each time a trigger occurs, the 8102 generates one complete output waveform. At the end of the output cycle, the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform. The instrument may be triggered from one of the following sources: A rear panel input, designated as TRIG IN, front panel button, marked MAN TRIG and a remote command such as *TRG. When placed in EXT (external) trigger source, remote commands are ignored and the instrument monitors the TRIG IN connector or the MAN TRIG control. When in BUS, the hardware inputs are ignored and only remote commands can trigger the instrument. The MIX is a special trigger advance mode that senses the first remote trigger and only then enables the hardware sources. There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode: Source – defines the trigger source. EXT enables the rear panel trigger input, BUS enables remote commands and MIX enables remote command and after the first trigger enables the EXT source. Slope – defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Level – sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector. Signal transition to above the trigger level will trigger the instrument. When the slope is set to negative, transitions to below the trigger level will trigger the instrument. Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input Trigger Delay – defines the state of the delayed trigger function. 3-18 Using the Instrument Selecting the Modulation Run Modes 3 Re-Trigger – defines the state of the re-trigger function You may use the triggered mode to trigger standard, arbitrary sequenced and modulated waveforms. However, note that in modulation mode, the output generate CW frequency before and after the trigger event. The Trigger run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3-9. Figure -9, Trigger Run Mode Parameters Delayed Trigger The delayed trigger function operates in conjunction with the triggered and counted burst modes. When enabled, it inhibits the output signal for a pre-determined period after a valid trigger. The delay time defines the time that will lapse from a valid trigger (hardware or software) to output. To enable the delayed trigger feature, scroll down to the Trigger Delay State field and press Enter. Use the down key to change the sate to ON and press enter again to lock in the state position. The delay field then becomes active. Scroll down to the delay field and press enter. Modify the delay to match your delay requirement and press Enter again. Note that the minimum delay is 200ns and can be increased to over 20 seconds with 20ns resolution. Re-Trigger The re-trigger function operates in conjunction with the triggered and counted burst modes. When enabled, it does not modify the output except when a valid trigger is received. It then starts an automatic sequence of internal triggers that generate repeated output cycles or bursts. The time in the re-trigger group defines the time that will lapse from the end of the signal to the start of the next signal. To enable the re-trigger feature, scroll down to the Re-Trigger State field and press Enter. Use the down key to change the sate to ON 3-19 8101/8102 User Manual and press enter again to lock in the state position. The re-trigger time field then becomes active. Scroll down to the re-trigger time field and press enter. Modify the time to match your requirement and press Enter again. Note that the minimum re-trigger interval is 200ns and can be increased to over 20 seconds with 20ns resolution. Gated Mode When set to gated mode, the 8102 output remains at a DC level as long as the rear-panel TRIG IN signal remains inactive. The output gates on and off between two transitions, either positive or negative, depending on the slope setting. Only the rear panel TRIG IN connector can be used for operating the gated mode. When placed in gated mode, the generator idles on a DC level until the first gate on transition. The signal will complete after the gate off transition and the generator will once again resume DC level equal to the last point of the waveform. There are two parameters you can adjust for the gated mode: Source – defines the gating signal source. Since the gated run mode relies on hardware transitions, only EXT is a valid source for the gated mode. Slope – defines if the generator is gating on and off on positive or negative transitions. Level – sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector. Signal transition to above the trigger level will gate the instrument. When the slope is set to negative, transitions to below the trigger level will gate the instrument. Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input You may use the gated mode to gate standard, arbitrary and modulated waveforms. The gated run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3-10. 3-20 Using the Instrument Selecting the Modulation Run Modes 3 Figure -10, Gated Mode Parameters Burst Mode Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode with the exception that only one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output waveforms. In Burst mode, the output remains at a DC level as long as a valid trigger signal has not occurred. Each time a trigger occurs, the 8102 generates a counted number of burst of waveforms. At the end of the output burst, the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform. The instrument may be triggered from one of the following sources: A rear panel input, designated as TRIG IN, front panel button, marked MAN TRIG and a remote command such as *TRG. When placed in EXT (external) trigger source, remote commands are ignored and the instrument monitors the TRIG IN connector or the MAN TRIG control. When in BUS, the hardware inputs are ignored and only remote commands can trigger the instrument. The MIX is a special trigger advance mode that senses the first remote trigger and only then enables the hardware sources. There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode: Source – defines the trigger source. EXT enables the rear panel trigger input, BUS enables remote commands and MIX enables remote command and after the first trigger enables the EXT source. Slope – defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Level – sets the trigger level crossing point for the rear panel TRIG IN connector. Signal transition to above the trigger level will trigger the instrument. When the slope is set to negative, transitions to below the trigger level will trigger the instrument. Trigger level sensitivity and maximum level should be observed to avoid damaging the input 3-21 8101/8102 User Manual Burst – Defines the number of cycles the generator will output after a trigger signal. Each channel can be programmed to have a unique burst counter. Trigger Delay – defines the state of the delayed trigger function. Re-Trigger – defines the state of the re-trigger function You may use the counted burst mode in conjunction with standard, arbitrary and modulated waveforms only. The Burst run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3-11. Figure -11, Burst Run Mode Parameters Using the Manual Trigger The manual trigger allows you to trigger or gate the 8102 directly from the front panel. This button is active only when the generator is placed in external trigger only. The MAN TRIG button is a second function to the Enter button and can be used only when the display is not in editing mode. Using the SYNC Output For safety reasons, every time you turn the 8102 OFF and ON, the SYNC output defaults to OFF. If you want to use the SYNC output you must turn it on immediately after you power up the generator. You can turn the SYNC on using the ON/OFF SYNC hot key as was explained earlier in this chapter or you can do it from the Outputs menus shown in Figure 3-12. 3-22 Using the Instrument Applying Filters 3 Figure -12, SYNC and Filter Parameters There are four parameters you can adjust for the SYNC output: Output – Turns the SYNC output on and off. Note that the termination of the output state shifts the dc level to 0V but leaves a low impedance path to the connector and therefore, if your UUT (unit under test) is sensitive to level transitions, make sure you remove the cable from this connector before turning the output state off. Source – Selects if the output is synchronized to channel 1 or 2. In fact, the two channels are always synchronized between themselves however, one may select either channel because the waveforms may be different for each channel and thus the selection options. Position – Lets you place the sync start at any point along the length of the waveform. Placement resolution is 4 points. As default, the sync signal is positioned at the beginning of the waveform. The SYNC parameters are shown in Figure 3-12. The Menu is accessible by selecting the Outputs soft key as shown in Figure 3-3. Applying Filters Two filters are available for each channel. These filters have fixed cutoff frequencies of which their properties are specified in Appendix A. The built-in filters are switched in after the DAC circuit and are used for reducing the noise, harmonics and spurious signals above the cutoff frequency. The built-in filters are available for the user in standard, arbitrary and modulated modes. The only function where the Model 8102 does not allow external control is when standard sinusoidal waveform is selected. 3-23 8101/8102 User Manual Note The default output function of the generator is the sine waveform. The instrument is using filters to reconstruct this waveform and therefore, the state of the filters can not be changed until another output function is selected. A setting conflict error will occur if one attempts to change the filter state before changing to another output function. If you do not plan on using the filters, make sure that you leave the selection OFF. This will eliminate confusing setting conflicts. Modification of the filter state and range is done from the Outputs menu. To access this menu select the Outputs screen as shown in Figure 3-3 and modify the parameters as shown in Figure 3-12. Generating Standard Waveforms The majority of applications require the use of common waveforms such as sinusoidal, triangular and square. In fact, these are the only waveforms that function generators can produce and therefore, one should expect that these waveforms be available even in a complex generator such as this. The 8102, being a completely digital instrument, has a library of built-in waveforms that allow generation of these basic waveforms plus many more. By default, the 8102 is programmed to generate one of the common waveforms in the market – sine waveform. Figure 3-13 shows a list of all other waveforms that the instrument can generate however, one must not forget that the waveforms are generated digitally from either lookup tables or formulated from standard equations and therefore, each time a new waveform is selected, one should expect to have a slight delay between the time the waveform was selected to when it is being generated at the output connector. The waveforms that reside in the built- in library are referred to as Standard Waveforms. The meaning of this term is that these waveforms have standard characteristics that is commonly known and or associated with these waveforms. For example, sine waveform has known spectral and power distribution that could be compared to published mathematical equations. The quality of the generator determines how closeness of the waveform generation to its pure mathematical properties. The 8102 has a library of 11 standard waveforms: Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, pulse, sinc, Gaussian, Exponential, DC and Noise. Some of the parameters for these waveforms can be modified to fine tune the waveforms for specific applications. For example, changing the sine start phase of the 2nd channel can create a 2phase sine system. The standard waveforms and their parameters that can be modified are summarized in the following paragraphs. 3-24 Using the Instrument 3 Figure -13, Built-in Standard Waveforms Menu Sine Wave The sine waveform is the most commonly used waveform. The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore, the sine waveform is generated with 1000-points accuracy up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically up to a point where filters are being switched in to reconstruct the waveform. The technique of generating sine waves above certain frequency is not within the scope of this manual however, one should remember that above certain frequency the waveform is loosing purity and quality because the number of points that are available to construct the waveform are inversely proportional to the output frequency. This statement is true for all standard waveforms and this is the reason for limiting the upper frequency of certain waveforms. There are certain menus that provide access to sine waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the sine waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. 3-25 8101/8102 User Manual Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Phase – sets the start phase of the output waveform. You will not be able to see any change in the waveform if you generate a continuous sine waveform however, if you place the generator in triggered run mode, the output will start the sine wave generation from a point defined by the Phase parameter. The start phase is programmed in units of degree. Reset Parameters – Resets the sine wave parameters to their original factory defaults. Square Wave The square waveform is a commonly used waveform. The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore, the square waveform is generated with 1000-points accuracy up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. There are certain menus that provide access to square waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the square waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Duty Cycle – programs the square wave duty cycle (pulse width to period ratio). The duty cycle is programmed as percent of the period. The default value is 50%. 3-26 Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters – Resets the square wave parameters to their original factory defaults. Triangle Wave The triangle waveform is a commonly used waveform. The waveform is generated from a lookup table that has 1000 points and therefore, the triangle waveform is generated with 1000-points accuracy up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The triangular waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the shape becomes distorted to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to triangle waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the triangle waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Phase – sets the start phase of the output waveform. You will not be able to see any change in the waveform if you generate a continuous triangular waveform however, if you place the generator in triggered run mode, the output will start the triangle wave generation from a point defined by the Phase parameter. The start phase is programmed in units of degree. Reset Parameters – Resets the triangular wave parameters to their original factory defaults. 3-27 8101/8102 User Manual Ramp Wave The ramp waveform is a special case of the triangular waveform with a slight difference, the ramp can be adjusted for its rise and fall times. The ramp waveform is a very common waveform and is required for numerous applications however, not being a true ramp generator, the ramp parameters are computed and programmed as percent of the ramp period. The waveform is computed every time a parameter is modified. 1000 points are allocated for the ramp shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The ramp waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the resolution of the parameters is lost to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to ramp waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the ramp waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Delay – sets the delay time for the ramp start. The delay is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Rise – programs the ramp rise time. The rise time is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Fall – programs the ramp fall time. The fall time is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Note that the sum of the delay, rise and fall times cannot exceed 100%. If the sum is less than 100%, the end of the ramp will remain at a dc level to the completion of the period. 3-28 Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters – Resets the ramp wave parameters to their original factory defaults. Pulse Wave The pulse waveform is a very common waveform and is need for the majority of the applications however, not being a true pulse generator, the pulse parameters are computed and programmed as percent of the pulse period. The waveform is computed every time a parameter is modified. 1000 points are allocated for the pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the resolution of the parameters is lost to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to pulse waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the pulse waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Delay – sets the delay time for the ramp start. The delay is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Rise – programs the ramp rise time. The rise time is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Fall – programs the ramp fall time. The fall time is programmed as percent of the ramp period. Note that the sum of the delay, rise, high and fall times cannot exceed 100%. If the sum is less than 100%, the end of the pulse will remain at a dc level to the completion of the period. 3-29 8101/8102 User Manual Reset Parameters – Resets the pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults. Sinc Wave The sinc pulse (sine x/x) waveform is a very common waveform and is required in many applications however, not being a true pulse generator, the sinc pulse parameters are re-computed every time a parameter is changed. 1000 points are allocated for the sinc pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The sinc pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to sinc pulse waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the sinc waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. #Cycles – sets the number of “0” crossing cycles for the sinc function. Note that the default value is 4. Changing the value to a different number requires re-calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector. Reset Parameters – Resets the sinc pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults. 3-30 Using the Instrument 3 Gaussian Wave The gaussian pulse waveform is useful in many applications. The gaussian pulse parameters are re-computed every time a parameter is changed. 1000 points are allocated for the gaussian pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The gaussian pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to gaussian pulse waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the sinc waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Exponent – sets the exponent factor for the gaussian function. Changing the default exponent value to a different number requires re-calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector. Reset Parameters – Resets the gaussian pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults. Exponential Wave The exponential pulse waveform is useful in applications simulating capacitor charge or discharge. Not being a true pulse generator, the exponential pulse parameters are re-computed every time a parameter is changed. 1000 points are allocated for the exponential pulse shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being 3-31 8101/8102 User Manual reduced automatically. The exponential pulse waveform is reasonable up to about 25MHz where 10 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the shape of the pulse is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to sinc pulse waveform parameters; These are: Frequency – programs the frequency of the sinc waveform. Note that at low frequencies (up to about 250kHz), when you modify the frequency parameter, the output responds with coherent change however, at higher frequencies, the waveform has to be recomputed every time and therefore, when you modify the frequency, the output wanders until the waveform is being recomputed and then restored to full accuracy. Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Exponent – sets the exponent factor for the exponential function. Setting the exponent to a negative value inverts the exponential function. Changing the default exponent value to a different number requires re-calculation of the waveform and may take a few seconds until the waveform is computed and generated at the output connector. Reset Parameters – Resets the exponential parameters to their original factory defaults. pulse wave DC Wave The DC waveform is useful applications requiring simply an accurate DC level. There are certain menus that provide access to the DC waveform parameters; These are: DC Level – programs the level of the DC output function. The amplitude is programmed in units of volts and generated continuously at the output connector in a similar way as a power supply generates its output. Note however, that the amplitude is calibrated when the output is terminated into 50Ω load impedance. 3-32 Using the Instrument 3 Reset Parameters – Resets the DC amplitude parameter to its original factory default. Noise Wave The noise waveform is useful in applications requiring generation of simple noise. The spectral spread of the noise is pseudo-random and is limited in its bandwidth by the bandwidth parameter. The noise parameters are re-computed every time a parameter is changed. 1000 points are allocated for the noise shape up to about frequency setting of 250kHz (output frequency = sample clock frequency / number of points). As frequency is increased above 250kHz the number of points is being reduced automatically. The noise waveform is reasonable up to about 2.5MHz where 100 points are available to generate its shape. As the number of points decrease further, the shape of the noise is deteriorated to a point where it is not usable anymore. There are certain menus that provide access to noise waveform parameters; These are: Amplitude – programs the amplitude of the output waveform. Note that amplitude and offsets can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the amplitude parameter in this menu overrides amplitude setting in all other menus. Offset – programs the offset of the output waveform. Note that offset and amplitude can be programmed freely within the specified amplitude window, as explained in the Programming Amplitude and Offset section in this chapter. Note that setting the offset parameter in this menu overrides offset setting in all other menus. Bandwidth – sets the sample clock rate which generates the noise. It also serves as a simple tool to limit the bandwidth of the noise to a know value. Note that while generating noise, bear in mind that the noise is generated in a certain memory size and it is being repeated over and over until the function is disabled. Therefore, the noise is not really random as is the pure translation of the word. Reset Parameters – Resets the gaussian pulse wave parameters to their original factory defaults. 3-33 8101/8102 User Manual Generating Arbitrary Waveforms In general, the Model 8102 cannot by itself create arbitrary waveforms. If you want to use arbitrary waveforms, you must first load them into the instrument. The 8102 is supplied with waveform creation and editing, called – ArbConnection. Besides waveform generation, ArbConnection has instrument control features, pulse composer and many other features that will be described separately. Figure 3-14 shows an example of a waveform that was created with the ArbConnection. Once the waveform is created on the screen, downloading it to the 8102 is just a click of a mouse away. Detailed information on the structure of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 8102 is given in Chapter 5. Information in this Chapter will give you some general idea what arbitrary waveforms are all about. Figure -14, the Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3-34 Using the Instrument Generating Arbitrary Waveforms What Are Arbitrary Waveforms? 3 Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points, which are stored in a working memory. The working memory is connected to a digital to analog converter (DAC) and a sample clock generator is clocking the data points, one at a time, to the output circuit. In slow motion, the output generates a waveform that resembles the look of a staircase. In reality, the DAC is generating amplitude hops that depend on bit arrangement and sample clock speed. The working memory has two major properties: vertical resolution and memory depth. Vertical Resolution – This term defines the precision along the vertical axis of which data points can be placed and generated by the DAC. The 8102 is using 16-bit DAC’s to generate arbitrary waveforms. Converting 16 bits to precision shows that each data point can be placed along the vertical axis with a precision of 1/65,536. Memory Depth – Defines how many data points can be stored for a single waveform cycle. The 8102 has 512k waveform memory capacity. Having such large memory capacity is an advantage. Modern applications in the telecommunications industry require simulation of long waveforms without repeatable segments. The only way to create such waveforms is having sufficient memory depth. On the other hand, if you do not need to use very long waveforms but must have many other waveforms stored in your working memory, the 8102 lets you divide the memory bank to smaller segments and load different waveforms into each segment. Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Downloading waveforms to the 8102 and managing arbitrary memory are explained in the programming section of this manual. This section assumes that you have already downloaded waveforms and want the instrument to output these waveforms. Refer to Figure 3-15 and use the following description to learn how to output arbitrary waveforms and how to program arbitrary waveform parameters. To select Arbitrary waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms, then Arbitrary. The screen as shown in Figure 3-15 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms. Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequence. Use the following procedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the arbitrary waveform function: 1. Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the edit field 3-35 8101/8102 User Manual 2. Punch in the value using the numeric keypad. Be careful not to exceed parameter limits while you key the numbers 3. Select and press a suffix 4. Press Enter to lock in the new value Alternately, after you display the edit field, you may use the dial and/or the arrow keys to modify the field then, press Enter to lock in the new value. If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment(s), then the output should generate your desired waveform. There are four parameters that are available for programming in this window: Sample Clock – Defines the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary waveform. Information how to modify the sample clock is given in this chapter. Amplitude – Defines the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform. Note that regardless of the amplitude setting, the vertical resolution of which the waveform is generated is always 14 bits. Offset – Defines the offset value of the arbitrary waveform. The offset and the amplitude can be freely programmed within a 10V window (+5V to -5V rails). Segment Number – Defines which of the segments in the working memory is currently active at the output connector. As was discussed earlier, the working memory can be divided to 2k segments and different waveforms loaded in each segment. Any segment is available at the output connector only if it has been selected to be the active segment. The segment selection field lets you select any segment from 1 to n regardless if it contains waveform data or not so be careful when you select a segment number as it may be empty and no output will be generated. Delete Segments – Allows distractive removal of all segments from the memory. In fact, this command does not erase the memory but only removes the table that defines start and stop for each segment location. If you have recorded your segment sizes you can always re-define the segment table, which will restore the original waveforms in each segment. There is however, no way back if you perform a download action after you delete the segment table. 3-36 Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 3 2 3 1 4 Figure -15, Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters Generating Modulated Waveforms Utilizing DDS (direct digital synthesis) technology, the Model 8102 is extremely frequency-agile. Changing the sample clock frequency is as easy as changing bits at the DDS control. The DDS has an extremely wide dynamic range with excellent linearity throughout the complete range. The properties of the DDS are passed on directly to the output therefore, the frequency is modulated within an extremely wide band, without loosing linearity. For example, the 8102 can sweep linearly from minimum to its maximum frequency whereas similar instruments that use the standard VCO design can sweep through 3 decades only. The 8102 can produce: Sweep, FSK, PSK, ASK, AM and FM. When modulation is used from one channel, the other channel is 90° phase shifted, specifically convenient for applications such as I & Q modulation. Modulated waveforms are selected from the waveforms menu. Figure 3-17 shows how to select the FM. To access this menu, press TOP, then waveforms and select the Modulated waveforms option. Modulation type is selected from the Modulation Type menu. Refer to Figure 3-17 and use the following procedure to select the modulation type. 1. Press on the Modulation Type soft key. The following options will display: Off, AM, FM, FSK, PSK and Sweep 2. Using the dial or the up and down arrow keypad, scroll down to the desired option 3. Press Enter to lock in the selected modulation type. The output will be updated immediately after you press the Enter button. 3-37 8101/8102 User Manual 1 2 3 Figure -16, Selecting a modulated Waveform Off The Modulation Off is a special case of the modulation function where the output is not modulated but generates carrier waveform (CW) frequency only. CW is the sine waveform that is being modulated. When placed in Modulation Off, the sine waveform is generated from the main outputs continuously. The advantage of this mode is that sine waveforms can be generated from 100 μHz to 100 MHz. Modulation off operates in continuous mode only. The CW parameter does not change when you switch from one modulation function to another. Figure 3-17 shows the Modulation Off menus. While in the Off option, there are some parameters that can be programmed for the carrier waveform: CW Frequency – defines the frequency of the carrier waveform. Using this standard AM function, the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine. The CW parameter, as programmed in this menu is shared by all other modulation options. Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. The Amplitude parameter, as programmed in this menu is shared by all other waveform options. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. The Offset parameter, as programmed in this menu is shared by all other waveform options. 3-38 Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 3 Figure -17, Modulation OFF Parameters AM The AM function enables amplitude modulation of a carrier waveform (CW). The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform, normally referred to as envelop waveform. The envelop waveform can be selected from sine, triangle square or ramp shapes. When AM is selected, the menus that are associated with AM will be accessible. These are shown in Figure 3-18. There are other parameters that control how the CW is amplitude modulated, these are: Modulation Shape – defines the envelop function. There are four shapes that can be used: Sine, Triangle, Square and Ramp. The Modulation Shape menu that provides access to the selection of the envelop waveform is shown in Figure 3-19. Modulation depth – programmed in units of % and defines the depth of the modulating envelop. Modulation depth is programmed from 0% to 100%. Modulation Frequency – defines the frequency of the modulating waveform. The modulating waveform is programmed from 10mHz to 100kHz. CW Frequency – defines the frequency of the carrier waveform. Using this standard AM function, the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine. Trigger Baseline – defines the idle state of the AM output when placed in trigger mode. There are two options: continuous carrier or dc level. The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered, generates the AM waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform. Selecting dc, the output generates dc level until triggered. Generates the AM waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform. 3-39 8101/8102 User Manual Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Figure -18, AM Menus Figure -19, Modulating Waveform Shapes 3-40 Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms FM 3 The FM function allows frequency modulation of a carrier waveform (CW). The carrier waveform is sinewave and it is being modulated by an internal waveform, normally referred to as modulating waveform. The shape of the modulating waveform can be selected from sine, triangle, square or arbitrary waveforms. Carrier waveforms are programmed with 10 digits resolution from 10 mHz to 100 MHz. The FM function has a number of menus that control the modulation parameters. These are shown in Figure 3-20 and described in the following paragraphs: Modulation Shape – Defines the shape and type of the modulating waveform. Although there are 5 options shown in the menu, there is a significant difference between the first four: Sine Triangle, Square and Ramp, and the last option – Arbitrary. The first four modulating waveforms are described in this section whereas, the arbitrary FM , being part of the modulation package options is described separately in the relevant section of this chapter. The Modulation Shape menu that provides access to the selection of the envelop waveform is shown in Figure 3-21. CW Frequency – defines the frequency of the carrier waveform. Using this standard FM function, the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine. Frequency Deviation – defines the range of frequencies of which the modulation will go through. The peak value is symmetrical around the value of the carrier waveform frequency. Modulation Frequency – defines the frequency of the modulating waveform. The modulating waveform is programmed from 10mHz to 100kHz. Marker– programs a unique frequency where the SYNC output generates a pulse to mark this frequency. Trigger Baseline – defines the idle state of the FM output when placed in trigger mode. There are two options: continuous carrier or dc level. The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered, generates the FM waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform. Selecting dc, the output generates dc level until triggered. Generates the FM waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform. Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. 3-41 8101/8102 User Manual Figure -20, FM Modulation Parameters Figure -21, Modulation Waveform Shapes FSK FSK (Frequency Shift keying) modulation allows frequency hops between two pre-programmed frequencies: Carrier Waveform Frequency and Shifted Frequency. Note that CW is sinewave only and that the switch between two frequencies is always coherent. The CW and shifted frequencies can be programmed with 10 digits throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument, from 100 μHz to 100 MHz. The FSK sequence is designed in an FSK table that can either be loaded from the front panel or downloaded from a remote interface from a utility such as ArbConnection. An example of the FSK table, as created in ArbConnection, is shown in Figure 3-22. When you select FSK modulation, the parameters, as shown in Figure 3-23 and described in the following paragraphs, will be available for modification: 3-42 Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 3 FSK Data – defines the sequence of which the frequencies will toggle. FSK data is stored in an external table. The length of the table is limited from 1 to 4096 toggle sequences. The FSK Data table contains a list of “0”s and “1”s which determine the sequence. “0” defines CW and “1” defines shifted frequency. CW Frequency – defines the frequency of the carrier waveform. In this case, the CW frequency will also be used as the idle frequency. Using this standard FSK function, the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine. Shifted Frequency – defines the frequency of which the generator will shift when logic level “1” is sensed at the trigger input. Baud – defines the rate of which the frequencies are toggled. The rate can be programmed within the range of 1 bits/s to 10 Mbits/s. Marker – defines an index point in the FSK sequence where the SYNC output will generate a marker pulse. Trigger Baseline – defines the idle state of the FSK output when placed in trigger mode. There are two options: continuous carrier or dc level. The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered, generates the FSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform. Selecting dc, the output generates dc level until triggered. Generates the FSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform. Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Figure -22, FSK Control Data String Example 3-43 8101/8102 User Manual Figure -23, FSK Menus PSK PSK (Phase Shift keying) modulation allows phase hops between two pre-programmed phases: The initial phase can be programmed from 0 to 360°, the shifted phase can also be programmed through the same range. The PSK sequence is designed in a PSK table that can either be loaded from the front panel or downloaded from a remote interface from a utility such as ArbConnection. An example of the PSK table, as created in ArbConnection, is shown in Figure 3-24. When you select PSK modulation, the parameters, as shown in Figure 3-25 and described in the following paragraphs, will be available for modification: PSK Data – defines the sequence of which the phase will toggle. FSK data is stored in an external table. The length of the table is limited from 1 to 4096 toggle sequences. The PSK Data table contains a list of “0”s and “1”s which determine the sequence. “0” defines start phase and “1” defines the shifted phase. CW Frequency – defines the frequency of the carrier waveform. In this case, the CW frequency will also be used as the idle frequency. Using this standard PSK function, the shape of the carrier waveform is always sine. Start Phase – defines the initial start phase. Note that the start and stop phase only define the phase difference between these values and not fixed values of which the generator will adhere to. Shifted Phase – defines the phase of which the generator will shift when logic level “1” is sensed at the trigger input. Note that the start and stop phase only define the phase difference between these values and not fixed values of which the generator will adhere to. Baud – defines the rate of which the phase is toggled. The rate can be programmed within the range of 1 bits/s to 10 Mbits/s. Marker – defines an index point in the PSK sequence where the SYNC output will generate a marker pulse. 3-44 Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 3 Trigger Baseline – defines the idle state of the PSK output when placed in trigger mode. There are two options: continuous carrier or dc level. The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered, generates the PSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform. Selecting dc, the output generates dc level until triggered. Generates the PSK waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform. Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Figure -24, PSK Control Data String Example Figure -25, PSK Menus 3-45 8101/8102 User Manual Sweep Sweep modulation allows carrier waveform (CW) to sweep from one frequency, defined by the sweep start parameter to another frequency, defined by the sweep stop parameter. Note that CW is sinewave only. The start and stop frequencies can be programmed with 11 digits throughout the entire frequency range of the instrument, from 10 mHz to 100 MHz. When you select sweep modulation, the menus, as shown in Figure 3-26 and described in the following paragraphs, will be available for modification: Figure -26, Sweep Menus Sweep Type – defines the steps of which the frequency increments or decrements from start to stop frequencies. A choice is provided between linear and logarithmic steps. If you select linear sweep the carrier waveform frequency steps through the frequencies within a time interval which is set by the sweep time parameter. Likewise, using the logarithmic sweep type, the frequency span between the start and stop frequencies is stepped through using logarithmic steps. Sweep Direction – defines the sweep direction. UP sets sweep direction from start frequency to stop frequency; DOWN reverses the sweep direction so the output sweeps from stop frequency to start frequency. Start Frequency – defines the frequency value of which the generator will start its sweep. Note that the sweep start can be at a higher frequency value, depending on the sweep direction setting. Stop Frequency – defines the frequency value of which the generator will stop its sweep. Note that the sweep stop can be at a lower frequency value, depending on the sweep direction setting. 3-46 Using the Instrument Using the Auxiliary Functions 3 Sweep Time – defines the time that will lapse from sweep start to sweep stop frequencies. Sweep time is programmable from 1.4 μs to 40 s. Marker – defines a frequency of which, when transitioned through, will output a marker pulse at the SYNC output connector. The default position of the marker is the sweep start frequency. Trigger Baseline – defines the idle state of the sweep output when placed in trigger mode. There are two options: continuous carrier or dc level. The continuous carrier option generates CW waveforms until triggered, generates the sweep waveform and resumes outputting continuous CW waveform. Selecting dc, the output generates dc level until triggered. Generates the sweep waveform and resumes outputting continuous dc waveform. Amplitude – defines the carrier amplitude level. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Offset – defines the offset level for the carrier waveforms. The same level is used throughout the instrument when you move from waveform shape to another. Using the Auxiliary Functions Using the Digital Pulse Generator The 8102, besides its standard waveform generation functions, has an additional auxiliary function that can transform the instrument to stand-alone, full-featured, Digital Pulse Generator Detailed operating instructions for the auxiliary function are given in the following paragraphs. The digital pulse generator function provides means of designing pulses and their associated parameters in units of time, exactly as would be done on a stand-alone, bench-type, analog pulse generator. Note however, that the pulse is built in the same memory as the arbitrary waveforms are being stored and therefore, changing from arbitrary to digital pulse modes and reverse, may overwrite waveforms that were downloaded to the memory. Use the instructions below to access and program the pulse menus. 1. Press TOP to display the root menu. 2. Press the arrow down key once and observe that the Auxiliary Functions menu appears. 3. Press Auxiliary Functions soft key and notice that the Pulse Generator option is highlighted, as shown in Figure 3-27. 4. Press the Enter button to select the digital pulse generator function Figure 3-28 shows the Pulse Generator panel and menus. 3-47 8101/8102 User Manual 1 2 3 4 Figure -27, Accessing the Pulse Generator Menus Note The pulse shape on the 8102 LCD display is an icon only. The actual output waveform may look entirely different. Figure -28, the Digital Pulse Generator Menus The digital pulse generator menus provide access to all pulse parameters just as they would be programmed on an analog pulse generator. To access the pulse parameters, use one of the soft keys. If you do not see a required parameter on the screen, press the key up or down to scroll through the menus. 3-48 Using the Instrument Using the Auxiliary Functions 3 The technique of changing parameter values is exactly the same as you are using to modify standard waveform parameters. Simply press the soft key that is associated with the parameter, then punch in the numbers using the numeric keyboard and complete the modification by assigning a suffix and pressing the Enter button. Figure 3-29 shows the screen after the Period soft key has been depressed. Figure -29, Programming the Pulse Period Parameter The final step before the modified pulse shape will be available at the output connector is pressing the Apply Changes soft key. NOTE No change will be made on the pulse shape and at the output connector before the Apply Changes button has been pressed, except when the High and Low Level buttons are exercised. This was done to let the internal computing circuit do the calculation of the pulse parameters only once every time one or more parameters have been modified. Adjusting the pulse shape with the required characteristics can only be done if all of its parameters can be adjusted both in the time and amplitude domain. The Model 8102 provides all the necessary controls to do just that. However, always bear in mind that the pulse is being generated digitally and therefore there are some limitations that would have to be observed. These limitations will be discussed later in this chapter. Below you will find a list of all pulse parameters that you’ll be able to access though the soft key menus. 3-49 8101/8102 User Manual Pulse Generator Menus Apply Changes This, by far, is the most important key to understanding the pulse generation process. The 8102 is actually an arbitrary waveform generator, not a pulse generator however, with some firmware changes, the same memory that is being used by the arbitrary waveform function can be converted to design pulse shapes. In this case, every change of pulse period, parameter or transition, requires re-computation of the pulse shape and download sequence to the arbitrary waveform memory. The process is critical to assure that the pulse design was done within the legal boundaries and generation capabilities of the model 8102. To avoid multiple design conflicts and tedious exploration of why a pulse cannot be designed with this or that parameter, the Apply Changes button makes the choice only once at the end of the pulse design. Therefore, always make sure that after you complete the design of your pulse, press the Apply Changes soft key button to end the design process and to route the new pulse design to the output terminal. Period The period defines the repetition rate of the pulse. The period is programmable from 80 ns. Delay The delay defines the time the pulse is delayed from its start to the first transition. The delay time is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore, if you do not plan to have a delayed pulse, change its value to 0 s. Rise Time The rise time defines the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its low level to its high level settings. Do not confuse this parameter with the industry-standard interpretations of rise time such 10% to 90% of amplitude. The rise time is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore, if you do not plan to have linear transitions, change its value to 0 s. High Time The high time defines the time idles on its high level setting. Do not confuse this parameter with the industry-standard interpretations of pulse width that is normally measured at 50% of amplitude level. Fall Time The fall time defines the time it takes for the pulse to transition from its high level to its low level settings. Do not confuse this parameter with the industry-standard interpretations of fall time such 90% to 10% of amplitude. The fall time is computed as part of the pulse period and therefore, if you do not plan to have linear transitions, change its value to 0 s. High Level The high level parameter defines the top amplitude level of the pulse. Any value is acceptable as long as it is larger than the low 3-50 Using the Instrument Using the Auxiliary Functions 3 level setting and does not exceed +16 V and does not fall short of the 50 mV minimum high to low level setting. Low Level The low level parameter defines the lower amplitude level of the pulse. Any value is acceptable as long as it is smaller than the high level setting and does not exceed -16 V and does not fall short of the 50 mV minimum high to low level setting. Polarity The polarity parameter provides access to selecting the polarity of the pulse. Three options are available: Normal, Inverted and Complemented. These options are defined below. Normal – The pulse is generated with the parameters as programmed for the pulse Inverted – The pulse is inverted about the 0V base line setting Complemented – The pulse is inverted about its mid-amplitude base line setting Note that except for Normal output, inverted and complemented replace high and low levels and rise and fall times. Double State The Double State toggles between single and double pulse modes. When double pulse state is turned on, the screen is replaced by an icon that shows that the double pulse mode is on, as shown in Figure 3-30. In this case, the Double Delay button is made available enabling access to the double pulse delay parameter. Figure -30, Double Pulse Mode Double Delay The Double Delay parameter programs the delay between the two adjacent pulses. This parameter is active only when the double pulse mode is turned on. 3-51 8101/8102 User Manual Sync Position The Sync Position parameter programs the position of the sync output along the pulse cycle. The position is the only parameter that is programmed in units of waveform points. The location of the sync is visible on the screen below the pulse icon and the number of points that are used for building the pulse shape is shown below the horizontal axis. Channel State The channel state comes in handy when programming pulse parameters for one channel only. This option is specifically useful because you may want to program one channel while the other channel was already programmed before and its parameters may collide with the new parameters that you are programming on another channel. When you select the Channel State OFF option, you may freely program all parameters on the other channel and the OFF channel will not be computed but will generate a dc level at its output terminal. Pulse Design Limitations Keeping in mind that the pulse is created digitally, using memory points, one should understand there are limitations of creating such pulses that evolve from this system. These limitations are summarized below. 1. Step increment defines resolution and period The pulse is being created digitally using a sample clock generator that clocks memory points. The rate of the sample clock defines the incremental resolution. Consider that you want to generate 100 ms pulse rates with 1 ms high time pulse and the rest of the period low. In this case, the generator can select the 1 kS/s to 10 kS/s clock rate because this is enough for generating a high signal of 1 ms using just 100 to 1000 memory points. However, when you want to define much smaller pulse widths at larger rep rates, the number of points that are used for the generation increases as a function of the period. The limitation is set by the number of memory points; with the basic model 8102, the incremental resolution is 1 in 512k. 2. Sum of pulse parameters cannot exceed the period While designing a pulse shape, bear in mind that the generator will detect automatically if you are trying to mess with the mathematics. Therefore, remember, the sum of all parameters cannot exceed the period. Always start your pulse design by assigning the correct pulse period and only then work your way down the parameters list. 3. Only single and double pulse can be designed Just as a stand-alone pulse generator, the capability that is built into the digital pulse generator allows generation of these two waveforms. This allows generation of single or double pulse patterns having a fixed high and low amplitude values. In case you need to design complex trains of pulse waveforms, you can always 3-52 Using the Instrument Pulse Design Limitations 3 do it using the Pulse Composer in ArbConnection. The pulse composer allows creation of complex pulse trains without limiting amplitude, shape and number of pulses in one pulse train. 4. Inter-channel parameter dependency As explained in 1 above, the pulse is created digitally using a sample clock generator that clocks memory points. The 8102 has only one sample clock generator and therefore, most of the pulse parameters that are associated with time interval are shared across the channels. When designing a pulse on one channel, bear in mind that some parameters will be exactly the same on the other channel. These are: Period, rise, high and fall times, double state and double state delay. The rest of the parameters are not interchannel dependent and can be designed within the limitation of the pulse generator, as specified in Appendix A. Understanding the Basics of Phase Offset between Channels The 8102 has two output channels that can generate various and numerous waveforms. Although the control over waveform parameters is separate for each channel, the sample clock is derived from a single source. Having a single source for both channels is of great advantage because of two main reasons: 1) There is no jitter between the two channels and 2) If we ignore the initial skew, both waveforms start at exactly the same phase. Understanding the initial skew term is very important. If you set both channels to output square waveforms and then connect these signals to an oscilloscope; If you then set the oscilloscope to its fastest time base setting, you’ll see the two rising edges of the 8102 signals. They do not overlap exactly because the instrument has a skew spec of ±1 ns. Skew is caused as a result of many factors. Although the two channels were designed exactly the same, small variations in printed circuit board layout or component values are enough to cause skew. These factors were known during the design phase and were minimized as practical. On the other hand, skew can also be generated from external factors that are controlled by the user alone. Examples for these factors are variation in cable length and quality, as well as, non-symmetrical end termination. Therefore, if you want to eliminate skew between channels, you have to use exactly the same cable type, the same cable length and the same termination on both channels. There are times, however, that you do need to offset phase between channels. In that case, the 8102 lets you adjust phaseoffset variations with resolution of one point. When you do, just keep in mind that the initial skew will escort your programmed phase offset throughout the entire phase offset range. 3-53 8101/8102 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset for Standard Waveforms The 8102 can generate an array of standard waveforms however, one should bear in mind that the 8102 is a digital instrument and that standard waveforms are created from lookup tables or computed from equations; The lookup tables or equations are converted to waveform coordinates, placed in the arbitrary waveform memory and then clocked to the DAC with the sample clock generator. The frequency of the output waveform is computed from the relationship of two parameters: sample clock frequency and number of points. Output Frequency = SCLK / number of waveform points As you probably already realize, the sample clock has a finite frequency, 250 MS/s in the case of the 8102. And therefore, to reach high frequencies, the number of points is reduced proportionally. For example, consider output frequency of 25 MHz, there are only 10 points available to create the shape of the waveform. With the above information on hand, we can deduct that if we want to phase offset one channel in reference to another, the number of waveform points determine the resolution of the phase steps. For example, for a 250 kHz sine wave, the number of points that are required to generate the waveform is 1000. So, phase offset can be programmed with resolution of 360°/1000=0.36°. On the other hand, at 25 MHz, the number of points that are required to generate the waveform is 10. So, phase offset can be programmed with resolution of 360°/10=36°. So how do you figure out how many waveform points are used and what is the best resolution you may get? Simply look at the display of the standard waveform. You may not control the sample clock frequency when you use standard waveforms however, the display provides information on the internal SCLK setting and you may find out how many waveform points are used by looking at the SYNC line below the waveform icon. With this information, you can now compute your phase offset resolution. Now, navigate to the Outputs menu, as shown in figure 3-31, you can see the Offset [Channel 2] field. CH2->CH1 delay is programmed in units of waveform points. Use the examples above to compute how many degrees are represented by each waveform point and enter the phase offset you wish to program. If you program any value besides 0, the start of channel 2 output will be delayed for an interval set by the following relationship: Offset [Channel 2] = n x 1/sclk Or, if you prefer to use phase offset in degrees, compute your phase offset resolution from the following relationship: Phase Offset Resolution = 360° / n (where n = wave points) And then multiply n by the value you program in the CH2->CH1 field 3-54 Using the Instrument Pulse Design Limitations 3 Figure -31, Programming Phase Offset Between Channels Contrary to what was discussed in the above, there are two waveforms that behave differently; these are sine and triangular waveforms. You can still use the phase offset method as was described in the above however, the two functions are different in a way that you can change the start phase on each waveform in increments of 0.2° regardless of how many waveform points are being used for generating the shape. This is true even if the number of waveform points do not allow such resolution however, it is also limited to 50MHz maximum. The phase offset for sine and triangle are changed from the Standard Sine and Standard Triangle menus and not from the Outputs menu. When you change start phase on one channel, you automatically generate a phase offset between the two channels, provided that both channels generate the same waveform shape. The phase adjustment for the sine and triangle waveforms is accessed from the Waveform->Standard->Phase menu, as shown in figure 3-32. Figure -32, Changing the Start Phase on the Sine Waveform 3-55 8101/8102 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset for Arbitrary Waveforms The method of setting phase offset between channels when the 8102 is programmed to generate arbitrary or sequenced waveforms is simpler because you already know how many waveform points you used for generating your waveform and what is the programmed sample clock and therefore, as discussed before, the delay is computed from the following relationship: Offset [Channel 2] = n x 1/sclk Or, if you prefer to use phase offset in degrees, compute your phase offset resolution from the following relationship: Phase Offset Resolution = 360° / n (where n = wave points) And then multiply n by the value you program in the CH2->CH1 field. Navigate to the Outputs menu, as shown in figure 3-69, and modify the Offset [Channel 2] field as required. Adjusting Phase Offset for Modulated Waveforms Modulated waveforms are generated by the DDS circuit and therefore the phase offset between channels cannot be modified because the DDS generates sine waveform only and does not depend on waveform memory for the shape of the waveform. Using the modulated waveforms, there is a constant phase offset between the channels; this phase offset is always 90°. The constant phase offset for the modulated waveform is especially valuable for generating I & Q vectors. Customizing the Output Units There are two parameters that could be customized for easier fit of the output parameters; These are: the Horizontal Units, the Load Impedance, Dial Direction, Clock Source and Display Brightness. Figure 3-34 shows the customization panel. Navigate to the customization display from the Utility menu. Adjust the brightness and the dial direction for your preferences and select the clock source as required by your system management. Information on the how to adjust the horizontal units and how to adjust the display for your load impedance is given in the following paragraphs. Selecting the Horizontal Units 3-56 Normally, frequency units – Hertz are used when specifying waveform frequency however, at times and as part of global system considerations, it makes it more convenient to work with time units – seconds. The horizontal scale of the 8102 can be modified to operate either in the frequency domain or time domain. The default setting for the generator is frequency units. Using the Instrument Monitoring the Internal Temperature Adjusting Load Impedance 3 As specified in Appendix A, the display of the output amplitude is valid when the load impedance is exactly 50Ω. Such impedance is absolutely necessary when operating at high frequencies where unmatched output impedance can cause reflections and standing waves. It is therefore recommended to terminate the output with 50Ω loads only. In certain applications where the load impedance is of no consequence, it may range from 50Ω to open circuit however, since the source impedance is 50Ω, the displayed amplitude will be different than the actual level on the load. If you know your load impedance, you can adjust the display to show the exact level on your load. The adjustment, as you can see in Figure 3-33 can be made separately for each channel. The default load impedance setting is 50Ω. Figure -33, Customizing the Output Parameters Monitoring the Internal Temperature The 8102 has an internal temperature sensor that allows monitoring of the internal temperature. In cases where you suspect that the instrument is getting too warm, or malfunction occurs, you can monitor the internal temperature to see if the cause is excessive heat inside the unit. The temperature information is also available to read from a remote interface, so constant control over system temperature can be maintained. Temperature reading is automatically read and displayed every time you select the System display from the Utility menus. Figure 3-34 is an example of the System menu, showing the temperature inside the unit as 35°C. To update the reading press the numeric “0” button. 3-57 8101/8102 User Manual Figure -34, Reading the 8102 Internal Temperature 3-58 Chapter 4 ArbConnection Title Page What’s in This Chapter?....................................................................................................... 4-3 Introduction to ArbConnection ............................................................................................. 4-3 Installing ArbConnection ...................................................................................................... 4-3 Quitting ArbConnection .................................................................................................4-4 For the New and Advanced Users ................................................................................4-4 Conventions Used in This Manual.................................................................................4-4 The Opening Screen............................................................................................................ 4-5 ArbConnection Features ...................................................................................................... 4-6 The Control Panels .............................................................................................................. 4-6 The Operation Panels....................................................................................................4-8 Main ...........................................................................................................................4-8 Standard...................................................................................................................4-10 Arbitrary....................................................................................................................4-11 Using the Memory Partition Table ...........................................................................4-13 Trigger......................................................................................................................4-15 The Modulation Panels................................................................................................4-16 FM ............................................................................................................................4-17 AM ............................................................................................................................4-18 Sweep ......................................................................................................................4-19 FSK/PSK ..................................................................................................................4-20 The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panels ........................................................................4-22 The System Panels .....................................................................................................4-23 General/Filters .........................................................................................................4-23 Calibration ................................................................................................................4-24 The Composers Panels ...............................................................................................4-25 The Wave Composer ...............................................................................................4-25 The Toolbar .................................................................................................................4-32 The Waveform Screen.................................................................................................4-33 Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor ............................................................ 4-34 4-1 8101/8102 User Manual Writing Equations ........................................................................................................4-36 Equation Convention ...................................................................................................4-37 Typing Equations.........................................................................................................4-38 Equation Samples .......................................................................................................4-39 Combining Waveforms ................................................................................................4-43 The Pulse Composer ...............................................................................................4-45 The Command Editor......................................................................................................... 4-63 Logging SCPI Commands ................................................................................................. 4-63 4-2 ArbConnection What’s in This Chapter? 4 What’s in This Chapter? This Chapter contains information how to install, invoke and use ArbConnection. Introduction to ArbConnection and examples how to program instrument controls and parameters and how to generate waveforms and download them to the 8102 are also given in the following sections. Introduction to ArbConnection In general, ArbConnection is a utility program that serves as an aid for programming the Model 8102. ArbConnection has many functions and features of which all of them share a common purpose – controlling 8102 functions from remote. As minimum, to use ArbConnection, you’ll need the following tools: 1. Computer, Pentium III or better 2. Windows 2000/XP, or higher 3. High resolution screen, at least, 1024 x 768 pixels 4. Pointing device, mouse or ball 5. Visa 2.6, or higher installation 6. Last, but not least, some basic knowledge how to operate computers and Windows-based programs. ArbConnection operation is divided into two main functions: 1) Front panel control and 2) Waveform generation and editing. These operating options are described in this chapter however, you must install ArbConnection before you can use it. The next paragraphs describe installation and first steps before going into in-depth operation. Installing ArbConnection The installation program installs ArbConnection on a logical drive of your choice. The default is drive C. It automatically creates a new directory and copies the files that are required to run the program. Before you install ArbConnection, make sure that there is at least 50 megabytes of available memory on your hard disk drive. To install ArbConnection, insert the distribution disk in the A: drive. Invoke Run and type: A:\Setup The install program does the complete job far you and creates a workgroup and icons to start ArbConnection. 4-3 8101/8102 User Manual Quitting ArbConnection Before you start roaming through menus and editing commands, we strongly recommend that you make yourself familiar with ArbConnection basics and concept. For now quit the program and spend some more time with this section of the manual. Point the mouse cursor to the File menu and press the left mouse button. Move the mouse cursor to the Exit command and press the left mouse button. For the New and Advanced Users For the New User Learning to use ArbConnection is easy, intuitive and quick, even if you have never used such programs before. After you have installed ArbConnection on your computer read the following paragraphs to learn how to find your way around ArbConnection’s menus. Once you are familiar with the basics, you’ll continue to learn about features, programming, and editing commands. If you can’t find the answer to a question in this guide, call your distributor or the Tabor customer support service near you and we’ll gladly assist you with your problems. For the Advanced User If you are already familiar with computer conventions and have basic knowledge of Windows programming, you may want to skip some of the following paragraphs. Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses certain typographical conventions to make it easier for you to follow instructions. These conventions are described in the following: [Enter, or ↵] Press the Enter or Return key. [Esc] Press the Escape key. [Alt-F] Press the Alt key and the key that follows, simultaneously. In this example the key that follows is F. [Ctrl-S] Press the Control key and the letter that follows, simultaneously. In this example, the letter is S. The control key also appears in the menus as a target sign. [↑] [↓] [→] [←] Press the Arrow key with the symbol pointing in the direction specified (i.e., up, down, left, or right). <+> Press the key for the character or word enclosed in angle brackets. In this case, the Plus sign key. 4-4 ArbConnection The Opening Screen The Opening Screen 4 Invoke ArbConnection by double clicking on the icon. If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, click on Start, Programs and ArbConnection. The opening screen will show. If you installed the program correctly, your screen should look as shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1, Startup & Communication Options The Startup & Communication Options dialog box is displayed. You can check the “Store and don’t show…” so next time you invoke ArbConnection, this dialog box will not be displayed. The purpose of this dialog box is to update the program in the way you intend to use it. For example, if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4, you can click on the Specify an Address option and type in the required address so the next time you use ArbConnection, the program will automatically resume communication with the same address as was originally detected. If you chose to hide this dialog box, you can still access and change the options from the System command, at the top of the screen. Make your selection and click OK. The Startup & Communication Updater dialog box will be removed from the screen. And the Main panel will now be accessible. But before we go into panel operation, let’s look at the toolbars at the left top of the screen as shown in Figures 4-2 and 4.2a. Figure 4-2, ArbConnection's Toolbars 4-5 8101/8102 User Manual The standard Windows Menu Bar is the top bar. It provides access to main system controls like saving files, and viewing or removal of screen images. Figure 4-2a, the Panels Toolbar The second bar is called Link bar. It provides direct access to different instruments that are active on the active interface bus. ArbConnection can control a number of 8102 units simultaneously. If the instruments were connected to the interface while invoking ArbConnection, they will automatically be detected by the program and will be placed in the Link pull-down window. The active instrument is displayed with its associated address. If you run ArbConnection in offline mode, the Link bar will show 8102, Offline. The Panels toolbar, as shown in Figure 4-2a, provides direct access to instrument control panels. The individual control panels are explained later in this chapter. The Main, Standard, Arbitrary, Trigger and the other buttons will bring up to the screen panels that are associated with these names. The Composers button provides access to the Waveform and Pulse composers. The first time you launch ArbConnection, the opening screen will have the Main panel open. Click on other buttons and interactively get the feel how ArbConnection opens and closes control panels. ArbConnection Features ArbConnection’s main purpose is controlling 8102 functions and parameters. The 8102 can generate standard waveforms from a built-in library, arbitrary waveforms from user-downloaded coordinates, modulated waveforms and much more. The only way to access all of these features is through software utilities such as Plug & Play drivers, and soft front panels. ArbConnection is built to provide complete control over the 8102. ArbConnection has four main screens: control panels, waveform composers and various utility control panels. The various screen images along with instructions how to access and use them are described below in detail. The Control Panels The control panels look and feel just as if you would operate an instrument from its front panel. They even look like instrument front panels, so operating function and changing parameters is easy and intuitive. Let’s look at the first panel that shows at the opening screen. This panel, as shown in Figure 4-3, is called the Main Panel. To begin with, let’s explore the panel controls to see how they feel, react and what they do. All other panels share almost the same feel, so the description of how to operate the Main Panel can serve as general guide for controlling the rest of the panels. Looking at the panel you can identify the following controls: Push 4-6 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 buttons, LED’s, radio buttons, Dial and Digital display. The function of each control is described below. Push Buttons – These are used for toggling a function on and off. For example, the Output Enable button in the Output group toggles the output on and off. The first mouse click will push the button inwards and will turn on a red bar at the center of the button, indicating that the function is on. The second mouse click will turn the function off. Radio Buttons – Are used for changing operating modes, or selecting between mode options. One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center, indicating its state condition. LED’s – The LED’s indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the Digital Display. Red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is selected. Only one LED can be ON at a time. HINT LED’s are turned on by clicking on the LED or the text next to it. The selected parameter is flagged by a darker LED shade. Dial – Use the dial to modify displayed reading. To use the dial, press and hold the mouse cursor on the dial and move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the number, or counterclockwise circle to decrease the displayed number. The dial modifies digits at the cursor position and will allow modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter. If you reach the end of the range, the dial will have no further effect on the display. If you do not want to use the dial, you can still change the display reading by using the [↑], or [↓] keys, or simply type the required number using the standard keyboard features. NOTE After you change the displayed readout, the 8102 will be updated with the new parameter only after you press the Execute button. Digital Display – The display is used for displaying and reading various 8102 parameters, just as you would use it on your instrument. Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue. If you modify the reading, the color changes to a lighter shade of blue, indicating that the 8102 has not been updated yet with the new parameter. Pressing Execute will 4-7 8101/8102 User Manual update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue, indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting. Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits. You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad. In case you do, the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you’ll be requested to correct your setting. The Operation Panels The Operation tab provides access to a group of panels that control the basic operation of the generator. From this group you can set the output function, run mode, turn the outputs on and off and adjust the parameters for the various functions. There are four panels in this group: Main, Standard, Arbitrary and Trigger. The Main panel is always visible because this is the panel that controls operating functions, run modes and sets the outputs on and off. The other panels can be made visible by clicking on the appropriate tab in the Operation group. The operation set of panels are described below. Figure 4-3a -, the Operation Panels Main 4-8 The Main Panel, as shown in Figure 4-3, is the first panel you see after invoking ArbConnection. Notice how buttons and LED’s are grouped; this is done specifically so that common parameters are placed in functional groups. The Main Panel groups allow (from left to right) adjustment of amplitude and offset, selection of waveform mode, selection of run mode and control over SYNC and Main output parameters. Controls, where applicable, are provided for each channel separately. ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 Figure 4-3, the Main Panel If you are connected properly to a PC and ArbConnection has detected your instrument, then every time you press a button, you are getting an immediate action on the 8102. It is different if you are changing parameters on the display; Doing this, you’ll have to press the Execute button for the command to update the instrument. The functional groups in the Main Panel are explained below. CH1 and CH2 Parameters The Parameters group has two parameters for each channel: Amplitude and Offset and a phase offset parameter that defines the phase shift of CH2 in respect to CH1. To access the required parameter, click on the LED or the text next to it to display the required parameter. The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. Function The Function group is used for selecting between function types. The 8102 provides four types of waveforms: Standard, Arbitrary and Modulated. By pressing one of these buttons output waveform will change to the selected option. The default function type is Standard. If you want to change standard waveform parameters, you can select Standard from the Panels bar. Run Mode The Run Mode group is used for selecting the active run mode for the instrument. You can select between continuous, triggered, gated and burst modes. There is no additional panel associated with the continuous mode, but if you press one of the other run mode options, you’ll be able to adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger Panel. 4-9 8101/8102 User Manual Output Control The Output Control group controls the state of the main outputs and the sate of the SYNC output. Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off. From this group you also control the position of the SYNC pulse and the source of the sync. If you select the SYNC source to come from channel 1, the waveform that is generated at the CH1 output connector will be synchronized with the rising edge of the SYNC output pulse. Selecting the SYNC source as CH2, transfers the synchronization to the second channel. Note that you’ll notice the difference only if you have different waveforms and waveform length in channels 1 and 2. The load impedance buttons allow you to adjust the display amplitude reading to your actual load impedance value. The default value is 50 ohms and the output range is calculated in reference to this value. If your actual load impedance is higher than 50 ohms and you increase the load impedance value in this group, the output of the 8102 will display the correct value as is measured on your load impedance. Standard The Standard Panel, as shown in Figure 4-4, is accessible after you click on the Standard button in the Panels bar. The Standard Waveform Panel groups allow (from left to right) adjustment of CH1 and CH2 waveforms and their associated parameters. The functional groups in the Standard panel are described below. Figure 4-4, the Standard Waveforms Panel 4-10 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 CH 1 and CH 2 Waveforms The Waveforms group provides access to a library of built-in standard waveforms. The library includes: Sine, Triangle, Square, Pulse Ramp, Sinc, Exponential, Gaussian and DC waveforms. Each waveform has one or more parameters that can be adjusted for the required characteristics of the output. For example, phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and dutycycle can be adjusted for the square waveform. The pulse waveform can be adjusted for rise and fall time as well as width and delay. Parameters that are associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when the waveform is selected. Note that by clicking a button in this group, you are immediately updating the 8102 output with this waveform shape. Parameters The parameters group contains buttons that control the source of the 10MHz reference and the setting of the output frequency for the standard waveforms function. The 10MHz Ref controls toggle between an internal and external references. The default setting is internal, which provides frequency accuracy of 1ppm. If such accuracy is not sufficient for your application, click on the external option but make sure that a reference source is applied to the rear panel connector; otherwise, the accuracy of the output will deteriorate completely. The Frequency control lets you program the output frequency of the selected waveform shape. The frequency parameter may be modified when the LED illuminates. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. Arbitrary The Arbitrary panel, as shown in Figure 4-5, is invoked by pressing the Arb button on the Panels bar. Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary Panel from the Panels menu, the 8102 will not change its output type. On the other hand, if you select the arbitrary from the Main Panel, the 8102 will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type. The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below. Parameters The Parameters group contains three parameters for each channel: Amplitude and Offset. Actually, the values exhibited in this group are exactly the same as in the Main Panel, so every time you change amplitude and offset in the Parameters group, the other panels are updated automatically. The segment parameter provides access to the active segment for each channel. To access the required parameter, click on the parameter name. The LED next to the required parameter turns on. The value that is 4-11 8101/8102 User Manual associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. Figure 4-5, the Arbitrary Panel SCLK The SCLK (Sample Clock) group is comprised of parameters that control the sample clock frequency. The sample clock setting affects the 8102 in arbitrary mode only. The sample clock rate is programmed in units of S/s (samples per second) and will affect the instrument only when it is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms. The SCLK parameter has no effect on the frequency of the standard waveforms. The two switches in the SCLK group select between internal and external sample clock inputs. The internal is the default setting. When you select the external sample clock option, make sure an appropriate signal is connected to the external sample clock connector on the rear panel. To access the required parameter, click on the button until the LED next to the required parameter turns on. The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. 10MHz Ref The 10MHz Ref controls toggle between an internal and external references. The default setting is internal, which provides frequency accuracy of 1ppm. If such accuracy is not sufficient for your 4-12 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 application, click on the external option but make sure that a reference source is applied to the rear panel connector; otherwise, the accuracy of the output will deteriorate completely. Memory Management The memory management group provides access to the memory partition screen. The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4-6. Information how to use these screens is given in the following paragraphs. Using the Memory Partition Table If you want to learn more about waveform memory and segment control, you should refer to section 3 of this manual. In general, the 8102 can generate arbitrary waveforms but, before it can generate waveforms, they must be downloaded to the instrument from a host computer. Waveforms are downloaded to the instrument as coordinates and are stored in the 8102 in a place designated as “waveform memory”. The waveform memory has a finite size of 512k. Having such long memory does not necessarily mean that you have to use the entire memory every time you download a waveform. On the contrary, the 8102 allows segmentation of the memory so that up to 4096 smaller waveforms could be stored in this memory. There are two ways to divide the waveform memory to segments: 1) Define a segment and load it with waveform data, define the next and load with data, then the third etc. or 2) Use what ArbConnection has to offer and that is to make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments, download it to the instrument in one shot and then download a memory partition table that splits the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes. Want to use it? Here is how it is done. Point and click on the Memory Partition. A dialog box as shown in Figure 4-6 will pop up. 4-13 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-6, the Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segment number and segment size. The Seg No (segment number) is an index field that has values only, from 1 to 2048. The Segment Size is always associated with the segment number. You can program any segment size from 16 to 512k. Use the Append key to add a segment at the end of the segment list. If you highlighted a segment, the Append key turns automatically to insert Use the Insert key to insert a segment at the cursor location. The Delete key is used for deleting a segment at the cursor position. The Clear All key will remove all segments from the table and will let you start designing your segment table from fresh. Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen. The Save key saves the current session so you can start the Memory Partition table from the same point after you close this session. The Download key updates the 8102 with the present segment table settings. TIP The Memory Partition table does not download waveforms. Use the memory partition table only if you merged a few waveforms to one. The partition table then divides the memory to the individual and original size of each waveform. 4-14 ArbConnection The Control Panels Trigger 4 The Trigger panel, as shown in Figure 4-7, is invoked by pressing the Trigger button on the Panels bar. Note that if you invoke the Trigger Panel from the Panels menu, the 8102 will not change its trigger mode. To modify the instrument run mode, use the Main Panel. The trigger parameters and setting in the Trigger Panel will have an effect on the 8102 only if an appropriate run mode setting has been selected. The Trigger Panel groups allow (from left to right) adjustment of Trigger Modifier and their associated Trigger Parameters. The functional groups in the Standard panel are described below. Trigger Modifier The Trigger modifier group provides access to delayed trigger state and its delay parameter, to the Re-trigger state and its parameter and to the burst count for channel 1 and channel 2. To change trigger burst count for channels 1 or 2, point and click on one of these parameters. The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. Figure 4-7, the Trigger Panel Trigger Parameters Slope - The Slope group lets you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 8102. If you click on Pos, the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal. Likewise, if you click on Neg, the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal. 4-15 8101/8102 User Manual Source - The 8102 can accept triggers from a number of sources: BUS, External or Mixed. When the Bus option is selected, only bus commands trigger the instrument. The External position is the default trigger option which enables the rear panel trigger input and the front panel manual trigger button. The Mixed position disables the rear-panel trigger input until a software command is executed, the trigger source then reverts to the rear-panel trigger input. Manual – Use this button when an external generator is not available. Pressing the Manual button is stimulating the instrument as if an external trigger has been applied. Trigger Level – Programs the trigger level parameter. Depending on the slope setting, the 8102 will be stimulated to output waveforms when the trigger level threshold has been crossed. The Modulation Panels Figure 4-8a, the Modulation Panels The Modulation functions were designed over seven separate panels, as shown in Figures 4-8 through 4-11. The panels are invoked by pressing the Modulation header and then one of the modulation panels that appear below it (Figure 4-8a). These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective run modes and parameters. The modulation functions that are available on these panels are: FM (frequency modulation), AM (amplitude modulation), Sweep, FSK (frequency shift keying), and PSK (phase shift keying). All modulation functions are programmed simultaneously for both channels except AM where each channel can be programmed separately with a different set of parameters. When modulation run other than continuous is selected, there are two options that control the idle state between triggers: 1) Carrier baseline and 2) DC baseline. When the first option is selected, the instrument generates non-modulated carrier frequency (CW) until a valid stimuli signal is applied and when the second option is selected, the instrument generates a dc level signal until a stimulated to generate a modulation cycle. The modulation options, their associated parameters and the various run mode options are described separately for each of the panels. The Modulation Group is common to all modulation panels. It contains an array of buttons that select the appropriate modulation scheme. It also provides access to the CW (Carrier Waveform) frequency setting. The CW frequency parameter is common to all of the modulation functions. 4-16 ArbConnection The Control Panels FM 4 The FM group contains parameters for controlling the frequency modulation function. To turn the FM function on and off, click on the FM button in the Modulation group. The various controls in the FM group are described below. Standard FM Parameters Allow adjustment of the parameters that are associated with the standard modulating waveform. The controllable parameters are Modulation, Deviation and the Marker Frequencies. Mod. Wave Defines the shape of the modulating waveform. If you do not need exotic waveforms, you can use one of the built-in standard wave shapes: Sine, Triangle, Square, or Ramp. These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range. Figure 4-8, the FM Panel 4-17 8101/8102 User Manual AM Although both channels are set to output amplitude modulations simultaneously, each channel can be programmed to be modulated using a unique envelop waveform. There are two sets of identical parameters for each channel, as discussed in the following paragraphs. CH1/CH2 Mod Wave There is a list of 4 waveforms that can be selected to modulate the carrier waveform (CW). These are sine, triangle, square and ramp. The frequency and amplitude of the modulating waveforms are programmable Freq Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform. Note that the frequency setting must be smaller than the CW frequency for the AM function to operate correctly. Although, two frequency parameters are shown on this panel, the frequency of the modulating waveform is identical for both channels. Depth The Depth parameter programs the modulation depth, or index in percent of the un-modulated CW amplitude. The depth is symmetrical about the center of the CW amplitude. Figure 4-9, the AM Panel 4-18 ArbConnection The Control Panels Sweep 4 The Sweep group contains parameters for controlling sweep options. To turn the Sweep function on and off, click on the SWP button in Modulation group. The various parameters that control sweep features are described below. Step Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options: linear, or logarithmic. Direction Use these keys to program sweep direction. Up select sweep from Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting. Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation. Parameters Allow adjustment of Sweep Start, Stop and Sweep Time. You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Mark parameter. To access the required parameter, click on the button below parameters sub-group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on. The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new setting. Figure 4-10, the Sweep Modulation Panel 4-19 8101/8102 User Manual FSK/PSK The FSK/PSK panel contains parameters for controlling the FSK and the PSK functions. To select the required function, click on the appropriate button and adjust the parameters in the associated group. The various controls in the FSK/PSK groups are described below. Figure 4-11, the FSK/PSK Modulation Panel FSK Control Data The Control Data button in the FSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base frequency and shifted frequency. It contains a list of “0” and “1” and the output will repeatedly follow the frequency shift keying sequence in the same order as programmed. “0/1” Frequency In FSK, the carrier waveform (CW) has two frequencies: an initial frequency level which is set by the “0” Frequency parameter and shifted frequency which is set by the “1” Frequency. The control data table has a list of “0” and “1” values that flag when the frequency shifts from base to shifted frequency. 4-20 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 Baud The baud parameter sets the rate of which the generator steps through the sequence of the FSK Control Data bits. Marker Index The marker setting programs a specific step (index) in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector. The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the FSK marker output. PSK Control Data The Control Data button in the PSK group provides access to the data string that controls the sequence of base phase and shifted phase. It contains a list of “0” and “1” and the output will repeatedly follow the phase shift keying sequence in the same order as programmed. “0/1” Phase In PSK, the carrier waveform (CW) has two phase settings: an initial phase which is set by the “0” Phase parameter and shifted phase which is set by the “1” Phase. The control data table has a list of “0” and “1” values that flag when the phase shifts from base to shifted phase. Baud The baud parameter sets the rate of which the generator steps through the sequence of the PSK Control Data bits. Marker Index The marker setting programs a specific step (index) in the control data string to output a pulse at the SYNC output connector. The SYNC State button must be turned on to generate the PSK marker output. To access the required parameter, click on the button below parameters sub-group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on. The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display. You can use the dial, keyboard, or the [↑] [↓} keys to adjust the readout to the required setting. After you modify the reading, press Execute to update the 8102 with the new reading. 4-21 8101/8102 User Manual The Auxiliary Pulse Generator Panels The Pulse Generator panel contains controls that select the pulse function and adjusts the pulse parameters. The pulses are generated digitally suing the arbitrary waveform memory and digital computation and therefore, there are some limitations to the minimum to maximum range that must be observed. The pulse design limitations are given in Appendix A. The various parameters that control the digital pulse generator features are described below. Figure 4-12, the Digital Pulse Generator Panel Pulse Mode The Pulse Mode group has controls to turn on pulse generator functions, select of the output generates single or double pulse shape and selects the pulse polarity from one of the Normal, Complemented and Inverted options. Pulse Parameters There are two types of pulse parameters: the Shared parameters are common to both channels so modification of one of these parameters affects both channels simultaneously. The shared parameters are Period, Rise Time, High Time and Fall time. There are also other parameters that can be programmed individually for each channel. These are: Delay, High Level and Low level. Programming channel 1 parameters do not affect channel 2 parameters and visa versa. To display and modify parameters, click on the and next to the required parameter change and modify time per your requirements. The range of each parameter is specified in Appendix A. 4-22 ArbConnection The Control Panels The System Panels 4 The System tab provides access to a group of panels that control some general system parameters and provides access to the calibration. There are two panels in this group: General/System, which provides access to some system commands, utilities and filters; and Calibration, which provides access to the calibration remote calibration utility. Note however, that access to the calibration panel is permitted to qualified service persons and requires special user name and password. Information how to access the calibration panel is given in Chapter 7. The System set of panels are shown in Figure 4-13a. Each of the panels is described below. Figure 4-13a, the System Panels General/Filters The General/Filters panel provides access to some general system common commands, allows read back of information that is stored in the flash and provides means of adding filters to the output path. The General/Filters panel and the various parameters that control these functions are described below. Figure 4-13, the General/Filters Panel System The System group has three buttons that are normally associated with system control. These are: 4-23 8101/8102 User Manual Reset – generates soft reset to the instrument controls and dialog boxes and modifies all parameters to factory default. A list of factory defaults is given in Chapter 5. Query Error – queries the 8102 for programming errors. This command is normally no necessary because ArbConnection makes sure that programming errors cannot be made from the panels however, while executing commands from the Command Editor, errors can be generated and the only way to monitor the errors is by using this command. Clear Queue – clears the error queue. The error queue can buffer up to 35 errors and then generates an error queue overflow message while ignoring new errors. This command clears the error queue and allows fresh errors to be captured. Data Base This Data Base is used for displaying or monitoring of certain parameters that are stored in the flash memory. These are: Instrument serial number, Last calibration data, 8102 installed options and the installed firmware version. Filters The Filters group has two sets of switches, one for each channel. Filters can be turned on and off freely as long as you are not generating the standard sine waveform. The following filter options are available: Off – no filter is applied to the output path 25MHz – a Bessel type filter that has 25 MHz cutoff frequency. 50MHz – a Bessel type filter that has 50 MHz cutoff frequency. 60MHz – an Elliptic type filter that has 60 MHz cutoff frequency. 120MHz – an Elliptic type filter that has 120 MHz cutoff frequency. Calibration 4-24 The Calibration panel provides access to remote calibration procedures. To access the remote calibration panel, you will need to have a valid User Name and Password and to quality to perform such calibration, you’ll need to be trained and certified by Tabor Electronics. Information how to access the calibration panel and how to perform the calibration is given in Chapter 7. The picture below is just for reference how the calibration panel will look after you gain access to this panel. ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 Figure 4-14, the Utility Panel The Composers Panels The Composers tab provides access to a group of composers that allow generation and editing of arbitrary waveforms and pulse shapes. Without utilities such as the above, the operation of an arbitrary waveform generator is extremely limiting. There are two waveform composers built into ArbConnection: Wave – for generating arbitrary waveforms. Arbitrary waveforms can be generated from standard libraries, from an equation editor, or imported to the composer from external utilities such as MatLAB. The waveforms can be edited and stored on hard or soft disks. Pulse – for generating complex pulse trains. Unlike a standard pulse generator, you can design and edit multiple pulse trains with linear transitions and variable amplitudes. Figure 4-15a, the Composers Panels The Wave Composer The Composers set of panels are shown in Figure 4-15a. Each of the composers is described below. Being an arbitrary waveform generator, the 8102 has to be loaded with waveform data before it can start generating waveforms. The waveform generation and editing utility is part of ArbConnection and is called – The Waveform Composer. This program gives you tools to create definitions for arbitrary waveforms. It can also convert coordinates from other products, such as, oscilloscopes and use them directly as waveform data. The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create, edit and download waveforms to the 8102 using the Waveform Composer. To launch the wave composer point and click on the Wave tab in 4-25 8101/8102 User Manual the Panels bar. Figure 4-15 shows an example of the wave composer. The Wave Composer has main sections: Commands bar, Toolbar and Waveform screen. Refer to Figure 4-15 throughout the description of these sections. Figure 4-15, the Wave Composer Opening Screen The Commands bar The commands bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View. In addition, there are ArbConnection-specific commands such as Edit, Wave and System. In general, clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands. Then, clicking on an additional command, may open a dialog box, or generate an immediate action. For example, Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Wave Composer. On the other hand, clicking on Wave and then on Sine, will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters. The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below. File Commands 4-26 The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files. Also use this command to print the active waveform, or exit the wave composer program. Description of the various commands under File is given below. ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 New Waveform The New Waveform (Ctrl+N) command will remove the waveform from the screen. If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New Waveform command, you should save your work before clearing the screen. The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform. Open Waveform… The Open Waveform… (Ctrl+O) command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area. This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer. The Open Waveform command can convert ASCII. *CSV (comma delimited text), *PRN (space delimited text) and *.0* (LeCroy binary format). The Open dialog box in Figure 4-16 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment. The file that is opened is automatically converted to *.wav format and can later be saved as a standard ArbConnection file. Save Waveform The Save Waveform (Ctrl+S) command will store your active waveform in your 8102 directory, as a binary file with an *.wav extension. If this is the first time you save your waveform, the Save Waveform As… command will be invoked automatically, letting you select name, location and format for your waveform file. Save Waveform As… Use the Save Waveform As… command the first time you save your waveform. It will let you select name, location and format for your waveform file. Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window. The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup, or print the waveform page. 4-27 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-16, the Open Waveform Dialog Box Exit The Exit command ends the current Wave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen. If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved, the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes. Edit Commands The Edit commands are used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the screen. The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs. Autoline The Autoline command lets you draw straight-line segments. To draw a line the left mouse button at the start point. Click again at the next point and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation. Sketch The Sketch command lets you draw free-hand segments. To draw a line using this command click and hold the left mouse button at the start point. Release the mouse button when you want to stop and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation. Smooth The Smooth command lets you smooth out rough transitions on your waveform. This is done mathematically by multiplying waveform coordinates by the non-linear portion of a cubic parabola. The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform that are bound by anchors. Anchor operation is described later in this chapter. Place the anchors on the left and right of your waveform 4-28 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 segment and select the Smooth command. The waveform will change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a parabolic curve. Note that small segments with fast transitions, when combined with parabolic expressions have tendencies to generate even larger transitions. Therefore, make sure you omit such sections of the waveform when you use this operation. Filter The Filter used with this command is moving average. This is done by recalculating each point as an average of symmetrical number of adjacent points. When you select the Filter command, a dialog box pops up, letting you program the filter spacing in number of adjacent points. You can filter the entire waveform, or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment. Invert The Invert command lets you invert the entire waveforms, or marked segments of waveforms. The waveform is inverted about the 0-point axis. Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point. This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its original left position. The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor point becomes the first point of the waveform. Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point. This command is grayed out if the right anchor was not moved from its original right position. The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor point becomes the last point of the waveform. Unmark The unmark command removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point 0 and the last waveform point. Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation. 4-29 8101/8102 User Manual View Commands The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the waveform area. The View commands include: Zoom In, Zoom Out, Hide/Show Toolbars and Channel ½ waveforms. Description of the view commands is given in the following. Zoom In The zoom in command operates between anchors. Anchors are marked as left and right hand triangles. The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform. To move an anchor to a new location, click and hold on the triangle and drag the anchor to left or right as required. If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left, the area between the anchors will zoom in as you select this command. Looking at the Waveform Map, as shown in Figure 4-17, you’ll see that the white portion is the zoomed area. Click and hold on the white area and move your cursor around and the waveform screen will be updated accordingly. Figure 4-17, Zooming In on Waveform Segments While zoomed in you can perform Autoline and sketch editing, or zoom-in further by clicking and holding the mouse at one corner and releasing the mouse button at the other corner. Zoom Out The zoom out restores the screen to display the complete waveform. 4-30 ArbConnection The Control Panels 4 Channel 1 The Channel 1 Waveform command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 waveform. If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1, the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0. Channel 2 The Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 waveform. If you have not yet generated a waveform for Channel 2, the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0. Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen. The Wave command has a library of 8 waveforms: Sine, Sawtooth, Square, Sinc, Gaussian, Exponent, Pulse, and Noise. It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor. Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below. Creating Waveforms From the Built-in Library You can create any waveform from the built-in library using the Wave command. Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box. An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4-18. This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms, so other waveforms will not be described. Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built-in library. Click on Wave, then sine… the dialog box as shown in Figure 4-18 will appear. You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box. Start Point – Defines the first point where the created wave will start. Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point. The example shows start point set at point 0. End Point – Defines where the created waveform will end. Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point. The example shows end point set at point 499. Cycles – The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points. The example below shows five sine cycles. Amplitude – 16-bit of vertical define 65,536 incremental steps. The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine. The example is showing sine waveform with maximum peak-to-peak amplitude. Any number below the maximum will generate an attenuated sine. 4-31 8101/8102 User Manual Start Phase – The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start. The example shows start phase of 90°. Power – The example shows sine cubed. Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine. Power range is from 1 through 9. Figure 4-18, Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built-in Library The Toolbar The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen, icons for saving and loading waveforms, fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more. The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4-19. For the individual icons, refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus. Figure 4-19, the Toolbar Icons 4-32 ArbConnection The Control Panels The Waveform Screen 4 Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen. Figure 4-20 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform between points 100 and 900. The various elements of the waveform screen are described below. The waveform screen has two axes – vertical and horizontal. Both axes are divided into points. The vertical axis is labeled from –32767 through 32768 for a total of 16,384 point. This number represents 14 bits of vertical resolution and cannot be changed because it is critical to the range of which the 8102 operates. The horizontal axis, by default has 1024 points (from point 0 to 1023). This number can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar. The maximum length depends on the option installed in your instrument. The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maximum of 512k words). Figure 4-20, the Waveform Screen 4-33 8101/8102 User Manual Notice on the left top and on the right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen. These are the anchors. The anchors are used as the start and end pointers where your waveform will be created. For example, if you want to create a sine waveform between point 100 and point 500, you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built-in library. There are two ways to control anchor placements. 1) Click and hold your mouse cursor on the left anchor triangle and then drag the curtain to the left position. Do the same for the right anchor. Notice the X and Y coordinates at the top of the waveform screen and how they change to correspond to your anchor placement. 2) You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform. An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4-18. Finally, when you are done creating and editing your waveform, you can save your work to a directory of your choice. The name at the title will show you the name you selected for storing your waveform and its path. Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor One of the most powerful feature within ArbConnection and probably the feature that will be used most is the Equation Editor. The Equation Editor let you write equations the same way as you would do on a blank piece of paper. The equations are then translated to sequential points that form waveforms and are displayed on the waveform screen. The Equation Editor will detect and inform you on syntax errors and, with its self adjusting feature, will automatically adjust your parameters so that none of the points on your waveform will exceed the maximum scale limits. When you invoke the Equation Editor, the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-21 will display. Use the following paragraphs to learn how to use this dialog box and how to write your equations. Figure 4-21, the Equation Editor Dialog Box 4-34 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 There are four sub-group parameters in the equation editor plus control buttons and equation field. These parts are described below. Anchor The anchors define start and end point of which the equation will be generated. By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal (time) scale however, the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations. Start – defines the first point where the created wave will start. Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point. End – defines where the created waveform will end. Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point. Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 14-bits of vertical resolution. That means that the equation is computed, resolved and generated with 1/32,768 increments and accuracy. The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases: 1) when the “amp” parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto. Information on these two operations is given later. Max – defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min – defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points. Level Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation. The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation. The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new amplitude and offset boundaries. If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key, your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation. The same way, you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset. If you check the Manual option, you’ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect. The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again. If you check the Auto option, your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting. 4-35 8101/8102 User Manual Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field. You will be using the Equation field for writing your equations. Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs. The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation. Click on the Store button to store your equation if you intend to use it again. The Browse button provides access to waveform pre-stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations. The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation. While you type and store equations, they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field. Control Buttons There are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box. Use the Preview button to preview an image of your equation, or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen. The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values. The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you previewed with your Equation Editor. Writing Equations The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates. As you probably already know, waveforms are made of vertical samples. The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the wavelength parameter. For example, if you have 1024 horizontal points, your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale. Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis. The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous waveform shape however, if you zoom in on a waveform line, you’ll see that the points are connected like a staircase. In reality, the 8102 generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but, if the waveform has many horizontal points, the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification. Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical (Amplitude) axis therefore the left side of your equation will always look as Amplitude(p)=, where “p” is the equation variables in units of waveform points. You can write equations with up to 256 characters. If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field, parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends. 4-36 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Equation Convention 4 The following paragraphs describe the conventions that are used for writing an equation. To avoid errors, it is extremely important that you make yourself familiar with these conventions before you plan your waveforms. Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation. You may only enter the right part of the equation. The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting. Case is not important and spaces are ignored. Numbers are entered in scientific notation. All calculations are done with double-digit precision. For the trigonometric functions, all angles are expressed in radians. A number of constants are provided: e, which is the base of the natural logarithm; pi, which is the circumference of a unit-diameter circle; per, which equals the programmed horizontal range; f, which equals 1 /per; omg, which equals 2 * pi / per, and numerals in the range of -1E^20 to 1E^20. There are three classes of precedence: ^ (raise to power) has the highest precedence; (multiply) and / (divide) come second; + and have the lowest precedence. Parentheses may be used to change the order of precedence. The following table summarize the mathematical expressions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with the Equation Editor. Equation Editor Operands ^ Raise to the power * Multiply / Divide + Add Ä Subtract () Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm pi (π) Circumference of unit-diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points f I/per omg (Ω) 2*π / per amp Amplitude in units of points or seconds sin(x) The sine of x(*) cos(x) The cosine of x tan(x) The tangent of x ctn(x) The cotangent of x log(x) The base IO logarithm of x In(x) The natural (base e) logarithm of x abs(x) The absolute value of x -1E^20<>1E^20 Numerals, equation constants (* )x = argument mathematical expression After you get familiar with the operands and conventions, you can commence with a few simple equations and see what they do to your waveform screen. Once you'll get the feel, you'll be able to 4-37 8101/8102 User Manual explore your own creativity to generate much more complicated and complex waveforms. Typing Equations If you remember from your old high school studies, the simplest curve of Y as a function of X is defined by the equation Y=aX+b. You can use the same “technique” to generate straight lines with the Equation Editor. Assuming first that p=0, try this: Amplitude(p)=1000 Press [Preview] and see what you get. Of course, you get an uninteresting line that runs parallel to the X-axis. Now, lets give the line some angle by typing: Amplitude(p)=-2*p+2000 Press [Preview] and see that the line slopes down. It may still be not very interesting however, pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation. You cannot type: Amplitude(p)=2p+1000, like you would normally do in your notebook; You must use the * (multiply) sign, otherwise you'll get a syntax error. Now we'll try to generate a simple sine waveform. Try this: Amplitude(p)=sin(10) Press [Preview] and… sorry, you still get nothing on the screen. The Wave Composer did not make a mistake! The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows. You are unable to see the result because the line on your screen running across the 0 vertical point. REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting. Now try this: Amplitude(p)=sin(omg*p) Still no good, but now press the [Adjust] button and here is your sinewave. So what's wrong? Well, if you'll give it a little amplitude it might help so, do it now exactly as follows: Amplitude(p)=8000*sin(omg*p) There you go. You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points. This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points (“p” is the equation variable, remember?). If you want to create 10 sine waveforms, you should multiply p by 10. Try this: Amplitude(p)=8000*sin(omg*p*10) 4-38 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Equation Samples 4 So far, you have learned how to create two simple waveforms: straight lines and trigonometric functions. Let’s see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting. Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation: Amplitude(p)=12000*sin(omg*p*l0)-8*p+4000 Press [Preview]. Your screen should look like Figure 4-22. Figure 4-22, an Equation Editor Example Now let’s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and different start phase. Type this: Amplitude(p)= 12000*sin(omg*p)*cos(omg*p*30) Press [Preview]. Your screen should look like Figure 4-23. 4-39 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-23, Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms. In the following example, as shown in Figure 4-24, 20% second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave. The original waveform had a peak-to-peak value of 24000 points so 19% second harmonic is equivalent to 4500 points. The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental, so term +4500*sin(2*omg*p) is added to the original sine wave equation. Use the following equation: Amplitude(p)=24000*sin(omg*p)+4500*sine(2*omg*p) Press [Preview]. Your screen should look like Figure 4-24. 4-40 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Figure 4-24, Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion. In Figure 4-25 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially. The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e^(p/-250). Increasing the value of the divisor (200 in this case) will slow down the rate of decay. Use the following equation: Amplitude(p)=12000*sin(omg*p*10)*e^(p/-250) Press [Preview]. Your screen should look like Figure 4-25. 4-41 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-25, Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as shown in Figure 4-26 is the most complex to be discussed here. Here, 100 cycles of sinewave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation depth of 20%. To achieve this, the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the fundamental or carrier. The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100*cos(110*omg*p) and the lower sideband by the term 100*cos(90*omg*p). Use the following equation: Ampl(p)=6000*sin(100*omg*p)+1200*cos(110*omg*p)-1200*cos(90*omg*p) Press [Preview]. Your screen should look like Figure 4-26. 4-42 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Figure 4-26, Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal with Upper and Lower Sidebands Combining Waveforms The last but not least powerful feature allows you to combine waveforms which you previously stored on your hard disc. You can write mathematical expressions that contain waveforms, simple operands and trigonometric functions similar to the example given below. If you want to use waveforms in your equations, you must first generate these waves and store them on your hard disk. You identify waveforms by adding the *.wav extension as shown in the example below. Amplitude(p)= Sine.wav*sin(omg*p*10)*Noise.wav/1000 The above equation will generate amplitude-modulated waveform with added noise. The following steps demonstrate how to create, store and combine waveforms using this equation. Step 1 – Create and store sine.wav. Invoke the Wave command and generate a sine waveform. Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As… from the File command. Save this file using the name Sine.wav. Note where you store this waveform as you would have to know the path for the next step. Step 2 – Create and store Noise.wav. From the Wave command select Noise. Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw noisy signal. From the File menu select Save Waveform As… and save this waveform using the name Noise.wav. 4-43 8101/8102 User Manual Step 3 – Write and compute the original equation: Amplitude(p)= c:/Sine.wav*sin(omg*p*5)*c:/Noise.wav/10 If you did not make any mistakes, your waveform screen should look as shown in Figure 4-27 Figure 4-27, Combining Waveforms into Equations 4-44 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor The Pulse Composer 4 The Pulse Composer is a great tool for creating and editing pulses without the need to think about sample clock, number of points and complex equations. Pulses are created on the screen, simply and efficiently in a special dialog box by typing in the width and level, or by using the “rubber band” method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude and time duration. The pulse composer can also multiply pulse sections to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals. To launch the pulse composer point and click on the Pulse tab in the Panels bar. Figure 4-28 shows an example of the pulse composer. The Pulse Composer has three main sections: Commands bar, Toolbar and Waveform screen. Refer to Figure 428 throughout the description of these sections. The Pulse Composer Commands bar The commands bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View. In addition, there are ArbConnection specific commands such as Edit, Wave and System. In general, clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands. Then, clicking on an additional command, may open a dialog box, or generate an immediate action. For example, Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Pulse Composer. The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below. 4-45 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-28, the Pulse Composer Screen File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control pulse waveform files. Also use this command to print the active waveform, or exit the pulse composer program. Description of the various commands under File is given below. New The New (Ctrl+N) command will remove the waveform from the screen. If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New command, you should save your work before clearing the screen. The New command is destructive to the displayed waveform. Open… The Open… (Ctrl+O) command will let you browse through your disk space for previously saved pulse waveform files and load them to the pulse screen area. File extension that can be read to the pulse composer is *.pls. Save The Save (Ctrl+S) command will store the active waveform in your 8102 directory with a *.pls extension. If this is the first time you save 4-46 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 your waveform, the Save As… command will be invoked automatically, letting you select name, location and format for your waveform file. Save As… Use the Save As… command the first time you save your waveform. It will let you select name, location and format for your waveform file. Print With this command you may print the active Pulse Window. The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup, or print the waveform page. Exit The Exit command ends the current Pulse Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen. If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved, the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes. Edit Commands The Edit commands are used for adding or removing pulse train sections. Use these commands to Append, Delete, Insert, or Undo last operation. The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs. Append Section The Append Section command lets you append a new section at the end of the pulse train. Only one new section can be appended at the end of the train. If an empty section already exists, the append command will alert for an error. New sections are always appended at the end of the pulse train. Insert Section The insert Section command lets you insert a new section in between sections that were already designed. Only one new section can be inserted at the middle of the train. If an empty section already exists, the insert command will alert for an error. Delete Section The Delete Section command lets you remove sections from the pulse train without affecting the rest of the train. If you use this command from the Edit menu, make sure that the section you want to remove is currently the active section. Remove all Sections The Remove all Sections command lets you remove the entire pulse design from the pulse screen and start from a fresh page. Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation. This command is extremely useful in cases where you unintentionally delete a section from the pulse train and want to restore it to the screen. 4-47 8101/8102 User Manual View Commands The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the pulse area. The View commands include: Pulse Editor, Full Train or individual Sections, Channel 1 and 2 screens and Options. Description of the view commands is given in the following. Pulse Editor The view Pulse Editor command invokes a dialog box as shown in Figure 4-29. In general, the pulse editor is used for placing straight line segments on the screen in intervals that define pulse width, rise/fall times and amplitude. Information how to use the pulse editor to create pulse trains is given later in this chapter. Full Train The view Full Train shows on the pulse screen all sections of the pulse train. Eventually, when all pulse sections have been designed, the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform. Figure 4-29, the Pulse Editor Single Section The view Single Section shows on the pulse screen one section at a time. Eventually, when all pulse sections have been designed, the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform. Channel 1 The view Channel 1 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 pulse train. If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1, the waveform screen will show a clear display. 4-48 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Channel 2 The view Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 pulse train. If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 2, the waveform screen will show a clear display. Options The view options command opens the dialog box as shown in Figure 4-30. Use this dialog box to fine-tune the pulse composer to the way it should deal with operational modes and the waveform memory. Information on options is given later in this chapter. Figure 4-30, the Pulse Editor Options Tools Commands The Tools commands let you download pulse trains to either channel 1 or channel 2. You can also clear the entire waveform memory using the Clear memory command. Note The Clear Memory command affects the entire waveform memory of the 8102 and therefore, be careful not to erase memory segments that you’ll need to use with the arbitrary function. 4-49 8101/8102 User Manual The Pulse Composer Toolbar The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen, icons for saving and loading waveforms, fields for selecting an active channel and more. The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4-31. The icons, from left to right operate the following functions: New waveform, Open an existing waveform file, Save pulse train, Save pulse train As, Print the screen and open the pulse editor dialog box. Other icons select the current view on the screen, shows channel 1 and channel 2 waveforms, clear the memory and download the displayed pulse train to the active channel. Figure 4-31, the Pulse Composer Toolbar Icons Creating Pulses As was mentioned above, creating pulses with the pulse editor is simple and intuitive, just as you would draw the pulse on a piece of paper. The pulse editor then processes the information, determines the appropriate mode and converts to waveform coordinates for downloading to the instrument for it to generate the required pulse shape. There are a number of terms that will be used throughout the following description; Make yourself familiar with these terms before you proceed with actual design of your pulse. Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor is the prime tool for creating pulses. To invoke the pulse editor, point and click on the pulse editor icon on the pulse composer toolbar. You can also invoke the editor by clicking on the Section Number icon as will be shown later in this description. The pulse editor dialog box is shown in Figure 4-29. Pulse Train The Pulse Train identifies the entire pulse design. When downloading the waveform to the instrument, the entire pulse train will be downloaded, regardless if part of the pulse train is displayed on the pulse composer screen. Pulse Section Pulse train is constructed from 1 or more sections. If the pulse is simple, it can be created using one section only. For more complex pulse train, the train can be divided to smaller sections and each section designed separately for simplicity. Figure 4-32 shows a complex pulse train which was made from five simpler sections and Figure 4-33 shows the design of the fifth section only of the pulse train. 4-50 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Figure 4-32, Complete Pulse Train Design Figure 4-33, Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design 4-51 8101/8102 User Manual Now that we somewhat understand the terms we use for the pulse design, we start with an example how to design the pulse train as shown in Figure 4-32. If you already have some pulses shown on your pulse composer screen, click on New to start from a fresh page. Another step before you design your pulse train is to set the design parameters in the options menu that will determine the way that the pulse will be distributed in your waveform memory. Click on View→Options and refer to Figure 4-34 throughout the following description. Figure 4-34, Selecting Pulse Editor Options Setting the Pulse Editor Options As shown in Figure 4-34, the pulse editor option dialog box is divided to functional groups: Mode of operation, Design Units, Memory Management and Pulse Transition Management. These groups are described below. Mode of Operation There are two options in the mode of operation group. The force pulse train to single segment option is recommended if you are using one pulse section only. In this case, the pulse waveform will occupy one segment only and the generator will automatically be set to operate in arbitrary mode. 4-52 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Design Units As you design your pulse pattern, it will be easier if you design it using the exact units as you would want to output to your load. Select between μs, ms and s for the pulse intervals and mV or V for the amplitude level. Select ms and V for the example we are going to build later. Memory management There are two options in the memory management group. The do not override loaded segments option will make sure that whatever waveforms you already stored for the arbitrary function will stay intact after you save your pulse waveform. The allow pulse design with no limitations option may overwrite memory segments that you already used previously for the arbitrary function however, this is the recommended option for the program and for the example we are going to build later. Pulse Transition management The pulse transition management parameter defines for the program how many waveform points will be used to step from one amplitude level to another amplitude level. The longer the transition time, the program will need more steps to smooth the transition. If you select the limit increments and set a pre-defined number of increments, you manually control how many waveform points will be dedicated for transitions however, if you are not sure what is the optimum number of increments, select the allow system control option for the program to make the transitions efficient in terms of memory usage and slope smoothness. After you complete setting the pulse editor options, point and click on OK. Using the Pulse Editor The prime tool for building pulse patterns on the pulse composer screen is the pulse editor. To invoke the pulse editor, point and click on the pulse editor icon on the tools bar. The editor as shown in Figure 4-51 will show. Refer to this figure for the following descriptions. 4-53 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-35, Using the Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor as shown in Figure 4-35 has four groups: Section Structure, Pulse Train Design Format, Section Properties and control buttons. These groups are described below. Pulse Train Design Format There are two methods (or formats) that can be use for designing the pulse shape: DC Intervals and Time/Level Points. The design format is unique for the current section and cannot be switched during the section design. DC Intervals – programs pulse duration using DC levels only. Transition times for this format are at the maximum rate that the generator can produce. For example, if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has 0V to 3.3V amplitude, 50% duty cycle and 1ms period, you enter the following parameters: Index = 1, Level = 3.3, Time interval = 0.5 (Cumulative Time = 0.5) Index = 2, Level = 0, Time Interval = 0.5 (Cumulative Time = 1.0) Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters. Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse. Time/Level Points – programs pulse turning points using level and time markers. This format is a bit more complex to use however, it allows pulse design that require linear transition times. For 4-54 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 example, if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has 0V to 3.3V amplitude, 50% duty cycle, 1ms period and 100ns transition times, you enter the following parameters: Index = 1, Level = 0, Time interval = 0, (Cumulative Time = 0) Index = 2, Level = 3.3, Time Interval = 0.1, (Cumulative Time = 0.1) Index = 3, Level = 3.3, Time interval = 0.4, (Cumulative Time = 0.5) Index = 4, Level = 0, Time interval = 0.1, (Cumulative Time = 0.6) Index = 5, Level = 0, Time interval = 0.4, (Cumulative Time = 1.0) Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters and the specified point is marked with a red dot. Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse. Section Structure The term Section Structure is used to define part of the pulse train that share common properties. There are four parameters that can be programmed in this group: Index, Level, Time Interval and Cumulative Time. Index – Is added automatically as you program pulse segments. The index line is highlighted as you point and click on pulse segments on the pulse editor screen. Level – Specifies that peak level of the programmed segment. As you build the pulse, the level window is expended automatically to fit the required amplitude range. Note however, there is a limit to the level, which is being determined by the generator’s peak to peak specification. Time Interval – Specifies the time that will lapse for the current index level. You can program the time interval and the cumulative time will be adjusted accordingly. Cumulative Time – Specifies the time that will lapse from the start of the current pulse section. You can program the cumulative time and the time interval will be adjusted accordingly. Section Properties The Section Properties contains a summary of properties that are unique for the current section. Design Units – Provide information on the units that are used when you draw the pulse segments. These units can be changed in the pulse editor options. Section Start – Provides timing information for the start of the current section. If this is the first pulse section the value will always be 0. Subsequent sections will show the start mark equal to the end mark of the previous section. Repeat – Allows multiplication of pulse segments without the need to re-design repetitive parts. After you enter a repeat value, press the Apply button to lock in the repeat multiplier. 4-55 8101/8102 User Manual Duration – Displays the time that will lapse from the start of the pulse section to the end. The duration shows the total time lapse, including the repeated sections. Control Buttons The control buttons allow appending, inserting, and deleting one or all index lines. The Undo button is useful in cases where an error was made and restoration of the last operation is critical. Pulse Example, Section 1 Now that we are better familiar with the pulse editor and its options, we are ready to start building the first section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4-36. Point and click on the New icon and open the pulse editor. Type in the level and time intervals as shown in Figure 4-36. Note that the pulse segments are being created on the screen as you type the values. Figure 4-36, Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example 4-56 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Tips 1. Use the tab button to edit the Section Structure fields. 2. Use Append to add an index line at the end of the list. 3. Use insert to add a segment above a focused line. Before we proceed with the design of the next section, pay attention to some values that are now available on the composer screen. On the left bottom corner of the composer, Vertical Scale is showing 10V (1.25V/Div) and Horizontal Scale is showing 14ms (1.4ms/Div). These two values are critical for the integrity of the design because they are later being interpreted by the program and converted to waveform coordinates that the generator can process and output as a pulse shape. These values, may change as you add more sections to the pulse train. Figure 4-37, Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example 4-57 8101/8102 User Manual Pulse Example, Section 2 The first pulse section is complete. We are ready now to start building the second section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4-37. Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option. A new section number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier. Before you start entering values to this section, note that there are linear transitions required for this section. Therefore, select the Time/Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format. You are now ready to start programming values. In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values, the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section. In this case, the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list. Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4-53. Pulse Example, Section 3 The second pulse section is complete. We are ready now to start building the third section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4-38. Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option. A new section number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier. Before you start entering values to this section, note that there are fast transitions required for this section. Therefore, select the DC Intervals option in the Pulse Train Design Format. You are now ready to start programming values. In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values, the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section. In this case, the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list. Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4-39. 4-58 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Figure 4-38, Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example Pulse Example, Section 4 The third pulse section is complete. We are ready now to start building the forth section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4-39. Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option. A new section number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier. Before you start entering values to this section, note that there is only one linear transition required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section. Therefore, select the Time/Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format. You are now ready to start programming values. Type the section entries as shown in Figure 439. 4-59 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-39, Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example Pulse Example, Section 5 The fourth pulse section is complete. We are ready now to start building the fifth and final section of the pulse as shown in Figure 440. Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option. A new section number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier. Note that there are fast transitions required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section. Therefore, select the Time/Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format. You are now ready to start programming values. Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4-56. 4-60 ArbConnection Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 Figure 4-40, Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example Downloading the Pulse Train Congratulations for coming this far. If you followed the above description how to build this pulse example, the screen should look exactly as shown in Figures 4-37 and 4-40. If you are happy with the results, the next step is to download what you see on the pulse composer screen to the generator. One more step before you download the waveform to the instrument is to check the Pulse Train Download Summary as appears after you press the Download icon. You can also view the same information if you select it from the View menu. Refer to Figure 4-41 for information how to interpret your download summary. 4-61 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-41, the Pulse Editor Download Summary Interpreting the Download Summary It is very important for you to understand that when you download a pulse waveform from the pulse composer, parameters and mode of operation may change settings on your generator. The download summary shows what will change and will let you reject the new settings if you do not agree to the changes. Once you press the Accept button, the waveform will be downloaded to the generator and the modes and parameters updated as shown in the dialog box. If you are already familiar with the changes and do not care to see the download summary every time you download a pulse waveform, you can check the box and it will not be shown on your next download. You can restore this summary from the View>>Download Summary command. Mode of Operation – This describes the new setting of the operating mode. This field could display one of two options: Arbitrary. Pay attention to the note (*) that says “Select from the menu View>>Options” Since we checked the Force Pulse Train to Single Segment (see Figure 4-50), the generator determines that the waveform mode be arbitrary and only one segment can be loaded with the pulse train. Memory management – By selecting the arbitrary mode of operation, the pulse train is forced to a single segment. This summary shows which segment has been populated and how much memory was used to build the required pulse train. Instrument Settings – Show the amplitude, offset and sample clock settings that will be changed on the generator. The settings in this summary cannot be affected from the pulse editor options settings. These are being computed and modified specifically for the current pulse train pattern and will change from pattern to pattern. Accept/Reject – These buttons are the final step before you download the pulse train to the instrument. If you are unhappy with the instrument setting and want to change some of the options, there is still time Point and click on the Reject button and go do your changes. Point and click on the Accept button to complete the download process. 4-62 ArbConnection The Command Editor The Command Editor 4 The Command Editor is an excellent tool for learning low level programming of the 8102. Invoke the Command Editor from the System menu at the top of the screen. Dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-42 will pop up. If you press the Download button, the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument. Figure 4-42, the Command Editor Low-level SCPI commands and queries can be directly sent to the 8102 from the Command field and the instrument will respond to queries in the Response field. The command editor is very useful while developing your own application. Build your confidence or test various commands using the command editor. This way you can assure that commands or syntax that you use in your application will behave exactly the same way as it responds to the editor commands. A complete list of SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5. Logging SCPI Commands The Log File is very useful for programmers that do not wish to spend a lot of time on manuals. When you use ArbConnection, every time you click on a button or change parameter, the command is logged in the same format as should be used in external applications. Figure 4-43 shows an example of a log file and a set of SCPI commands as resulted from some changes made on ArbConnection panels. You can set up the 8102 from ArbConnection to the desired configuration, log the commands in the log file and then copy and paste to your application without any modifications. Of course, this is true for simple commands that do not involve file download but, on the other hand, this is a great tool to get you started with SCPI programming. 4-63 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 4-43, Log File Example 4-64 Chapter 5 Remote Programming Reference Title Page What’s in This Chapter ...................................................................................................... 5-3 Introduction to SCPI .......................................................................................................... 5-3 Command Format.......................................................................................................... 5-4 Command Separator ..................................................................................................... 5-4 The MIN and MAX Parameters ..................................................................................... 5-5 Querying Parameter Setting .......................................................................................... 5-5 Query Response Format ............................................................................................... 5-5 SCPI Command Terminator .......................................................................................... 5-5 IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands......................................................................... 5-5 SCPI Parameter Type ................................................................................................... 5-6 Numeric Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Discrete Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Boolean Parameters .................................................................................................. 5-6 Arbitrary Block Parameters ........................................................................................ 5-6 Binary Block Parameters ........................................................................................... 5-7 SCPI Syntax and Styles .................................................................................................... 5-7 Instrument Control Commands.......................................................................................... 5-14 Standard Waveforms Control Commands......................................................................... 5-21 Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands.......................................................................... 5-28 Modulated Waveforms Control Commands....................................................................... 5-35 FM Modulation Programming ........................................................................................ 5-38 AM modulation Programming ........................................................................................ 5-41 Sweep Modulation Programming .................................................................................. 5-42 FSK Modulation Programming ...................................................................................... 5-45 PSK Modulation Programming ...................................................................................... 5-46 Run Mode Commands....................................................................................................... 5-50 Auxiliary Commands.......................................................................................................... 5-55 Digital Pulse Programming ............................................................................................ 5-56 System Commands ....................................................................................................... 5-61 5-1 8101/8102 User Manual IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries .........................................................5-66 The SCPI Status Registers ........................................................................................... 5-67 The Status Byte Register (STB) .................................................................................... 5-67 Reading the Status Byte Register ............................................................................ 5-68 Clearing the Status Byte Register ............................................................................ 5-68 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) .................................................................. 5-70 Standard Event Status Register (ESR) ..................................................................... 5-70 Standard Event Status Enable Register (ESE) ......................................................... 5-71 Error Messages ..................................................................................................................5-72 5-2 Remote Programming Reference What’s in This Chapter 5 What’s in This Chapter This Chapter lists and describes the set of SCPI-compatible (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) remote commands used to operate the 8102. To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation, the command descriptions are dealt with in a similar manner. In particular, each sub-system's documentation starts with a short description, followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub-system; finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described. Complete listing of all commands used for programming the 8102 is given in Table 5-1. Introduction to SCPI Commands to program the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993.0 standard. The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol. It goes one step further than IEEE-STD-488.2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument. It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument. SCPI is an ASCII-based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments. SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure known as a tree system. In this system, associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root, thus forming subsystems. Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system: :OUTPut :FILTer [:LPASs] {NONE|25M|50M|ALL} [:STATe] OFF | ON OUTPut is the root keyword of the command; FILTer and STATe are second level keywords. LPASs is third level keyword. A colon ( : ) separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword. 5-3 8101/8102 User Manual Command Format The format used to show commands in this manual is shown below: FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum} The command syntax shows most commands (and some parameters) as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters. The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command. For shorter program lines, send the abbreviated form. For better program readability, use the long form. For example, in the above syntax statement, FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms. Use upper or lowercase letters. Therefore, FREQ, FREQUENCY, freq, and Freq are all acceptable. Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error. The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets. The brackets are not sent with the command string. A value for the frequency parameter (such as "FREQ 50e+6”) must be specified. Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets ([]). The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted. The brackets are not sent with the command string. Command Separator A colon ( : ) is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below: SOUR:FUNC:SHAP SIN A semicolon ( ; ) is used to separate commands within the same subsystem, and can also minimize typing. For example, sending the following command string: TRIG:SLOP NEG;COUN 10;TIM 5e-3 is the same as sending the following three commands: :TRIG:SLOP NEG :TRIG:COUN 10 :TRIG:TIM 5e-3 Use the colon and semicolon to link commands from different subsystems. For example, in the following command string, an error is generated if both the colon and the semicolon are not used. OUTP:STATE ON;:TRIG:BURS ON 5-4 Remote Programming Reference Introduction to SCPI The MIN and MAX Parameters 5 Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some commands. For example, consider the following command: FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum} Instead of selecting a specific frequency, substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value. Querying Parameter Setting Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark ( ? ) to the command. For example, the following command sets the output function to square: SOUR:FUNC:SHAP SQR Query the output function by executing: SOUR:FUNC:SHAP? Query Response Format The response to a query depends on the format of the command. In general, a response to a query contains current values or settings of the generator. Commands that set values can be queried for their current value. Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode. IEEE-STD-488.2 common queries generate responses, which are common to all IEEE-STD-488.2 compatible instruments. SCPI Command Terminator A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a <new line> character. The IEEE-STD-488 EOI message is a <new line> character. Command string termination always resets the current SCPI command path to the root level. IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands The IEEE-STD-488.2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions like reset, trigger and status operations. Common commands begin with an asterisk ( * ), are four to five characters in length, and may include one or more parameters. The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space. Use a semicolon ( ; ) to separate multiple commands as shown below: *RST; *STB?; *IDN? 5-5 8101/8102 User Manual SCPI Parameter Type The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages: numeric, discrete, boolean, and arbitrary block. Numeric Parameters Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation. Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted. Engineering unit suffices with numeric parameters (e.g., MHz or kHz) can also be sent. If only specific numeric values are accepted, the function generator will ignore values, which are not allowed and will generate an error message. The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter: VOLT:AMPL <amplitude> Discrete Parameters Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values (i.e., FIXed, and USER). They have short and long form command keywords. Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed. Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters. The following command uses discrete parameters: SOUR:FUNC:MODE {FIXed | USER } Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false. The generator accepts "OFF" or "0" for a false condition. The generator accepts "ON" or "1" for a true condition. The instrument always returns "0" or "1" when a boolean setting is queried. The following command uses a boolean parameter: OUTP:FILT { OFF | ON } The same command can also be written as follows: OUTP:FILT {0 | 1 } Arbitrary Block Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the Parameters generator's memory. Depending on which option is installed, the Model 8102 can accept binary blocks up to 512k bytes. The following command uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary data: TRAC:DATA#564000<binary_block> 5-6 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles 5 Binary Block Binary block parameters are used for loading segment into the Parameters generator's memory. Information on the binary block parameters is given later in this manual. SCPI Syntax and Styles Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium. The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns; the KEYWORD, the PARAMETER FORM, and any NOTES. The KEYWORD column provides the name of the command. The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure, also known as the tree system. Square brackets ( [ ] ) are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command; that is, the 8102 will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not. Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form (upper case) and the long form (upper and lower case). The PARAMETER FORM column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value. Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets ( < > ). If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets ( [ ] ) these are then optional (care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords). The vertical bar ( | ) can be read as "or" and is used to separate alternative parameter options. 5-7 8101/8102 User Manual Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default Instrument Control Commands :OUTPut :LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :POSition 0 to 1e6-1 (0 to 2e6-1 with option 2) 0 :SOURce 1|2 1 NONE | 25M | 50M | 60M | 120M NONE INTernal | EXTernal INT [:CW] 10e-3 to 100e6 | MINimum | MAXimum 1e6 :RASTer 1.5 to 250e6 | MINimum | MAXimum 1e7 [:AMPLitude] 16e-3 to 16 | MINimum | MAXimum 5 :OFFSet -7.992 to 7.992 0 0 to 1e6-1 (0 to 2e6-1 with option 2) 0 :MODE FIXed | USER | MODulation | PULSe FIX :SHAPe SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | PULSe | RAMP | SINC | GAUSsian | EXPonential | NOISe | DC SIN 0 to 360 0 0 to 360 0 0 to 99.99 50 :DELay 0 to 99.999 10 :WIDth 0 to 99.999 10 :SYNC :FILTer [:LPASs] [:SOURce] :ROSCillator :SOURce :FREQuency :VOLTage [:LEVel] :PHASe [:OFFSet] :FUNCtion :SINusoid :PHASe :TRIangle :PHASe :SQUare :DCYCle :PULSe 5-8 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles 5 Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default Standard Waveforms Commands :TRANsition [:LEADing] 0 to 99.999 10 :TRAiling 0 to 99.999 10 0 to 99.99 0 [:LEADing] 0 to 99.99 60 :TRAiling 0 to 99.99 30 4 to 100 10 10 to 200 20 -100 to 100 1 -8 to 8 5 :RAMP :DELay :TRANsition :SINC :NCYCle :GAUSsian :EXPonent :EXPonential :EXPonent :DC [:AMPLitude] Arbitrary Waveforms Commands :TRACe [:DATA] <data_array> :DEFine <1 to 10k>,<16 to 1(2)e6> (<segment_#>,<size>) 1 :DELete [:NAME] 1 to 10k :ALL :SELect 1 to 10k 1 :SEGMent [:DATA] <data_array> Modulated Waveforms Commands [:SOURce] :MODulation :TYPE OFF | FM | AM | SWE | FSK | ASK | FHOPping | AHOPping | 3D | PSK | QAM OFF [:FREQuency] 10 to 100e6 1e6 :BASeline CARRier | DC CARR :CARRier :LOAD :DEMO 5-9 8101/8102 User Manual Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default Modulated Waveforms Commands (continued) :FM :DEViation 10.0e-3 to 100e6 100e3 SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | RAMP | ARB SIN 10e-3 to 350e3 10e3 1 to 2.5e6 1e6 10e-3 to 100e6 1e6 :FUNCtion :SHAPe :FREQuency :RASTer :MARKer [:FREQuency] :DATA <data_array> :AM :FUNCtion :SHAPe SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | RAMP SIN 10e-3 to 1e6 10e3 0 to 100 50 10 to 100.0e6 10e3 :MODulation :FREQuency :DEPTh :SWEep [:FREQuency] :STARt 10 to 100e6 1e6 :TIME :STOP 1.4e-6 to 40.0 1e-3 :DIRection UP | DOWN UP :SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic LIN 10 to 100e6 505e3 10e-3 to 100e6 100e3 :BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 :MARKer 1 to 4000 1 :DATA <data_array> :MARKer [:FREQuency] :FSK :FREQuency :SHIFted 5-10 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles 5 Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default Modulated Waveforms Commands (continued) :PSK :PHASe [:STARt] 0 to 360 0 :SHIFted 0 to 360 180 :RATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 :DATA <data_array> :MARKer 1 to 4000 1 :BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :CARRier :STATe Run Mode Commands :INITiate [:IMMediately] :CONTinuous OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :TIMe 200e-9 to 20 200e-9 OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 -5 to 5 1.6 BUS | EXTernal | MIXed EXT POSitive | NEGative POS [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :TIMe 200e-9 to 20 200e-9 :TRIGger [:IMMediate] :BURSt :DELay :GATE [:STATe] :LEVel :SOURce [:ADVance] :SLOPe :RETRigger 5-11 8101/8102 User Manual Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default Auxiliary Functions Commands :AUXiliary :PULSe :DELay 0 to 10 0 :DOUBle [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :DELay 0 to 1e3 1e-3 :LEVel :HIGH -7.992 to 8 5 :LOW -8 to 7.992 0 :HIGH 0 to 1e3 1e-3 :POLarity NORMal | COMPlement | INVerted NORM :PERiod 80e-9 to 1e6 (80e-9 to 2e6 with option 2) 10e-3 :STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :TRANsition [:LEADing] 0 to 1e3 1e-3 :TRAiling 0 to 1e3 1e-3 System Commands :RESet :SYSTem :ERRor? :LOCal :VERSion? :INFOrmation :CALibration? :MODel? :SERial? :IP [:ADDRess] <IP_address> :MASK <mask> :GATeway <gate_way> :BOOTp OFF | ON | 0 | 1 HOSTname: <host_name> 0 :KEEPalive :STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :TIMEout 2 to 300 45 :PROBes 2 to 10 2 :TEMPerature? 5-12 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles 5 Table 5-1, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default System Commands (continued) *CLS *ESE 1 to 255 1 1 to 255 1 *OPC *RST *SRE *TRG *ESR? *IDN? *OPT? *STB? 5-13 8101/8102 User Manual Instrument Control Commands This group is used to control output channels and their respective state, amplitude and offset settings, as well as the waveform mode. You can also set the phase offset between channels and select filters to re-structure the shape of your waveform. Multiple instruments can be synchronized with these commands, as well. The output frequency and the reference source are also selected using commands from this group. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in the Default column. Parameter range and low and high limits are listed, where applicable. Table 5-2, Instrument Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default :OUTPut :LOAD 50 to 1e6 50 [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :SYNC [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :POSition 0 to 1e6-1 (0 to 2e6-1 with option 2) 0 :SOURce 1|2 1 NONE | 25M | 50M | 60M | 120M NONE INTernal | EXTernal INT [:CW] 10e-3 to 100e6 | MINimum | MAXimum 1e6 :RASTer 1.5 to 250e6 | MINimum | MAXimum 1e7 [:AMPLitude] 16e-3 to 16 | MINimum | MAXimum 5 :OFFSet -7.992 to 7.992 0 0 to 1e6-1 (0 to 2e6-1 with option 2) 0 FIXed | USER | MODulation | PULSe FIX :FILTer [:LPASs] [:SOURce] :ROSCillator :SOURce :FREQuency :VOLTage [:LEVel] :PHASe [:OFFSet] :FUNCtion :MODE 5-14 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands 5 OUTPut:LOAD<load> Description This command will specify the load impedance that will be applied to the 8102 output. Parameters Name Type Default Description <load> Numeric (integer only) 50 Will specify the load impedance that will be applied to the 8102 outputs in units of Ω. The default setting is 50 Ω. The range of load impedance is 50 Ω to 1 MΩ..Accurate setting of the load impedance is crucial for correct display readout of the amplitude level on the load. OUTPut{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will turn the 8102 output on and off. Note that for safety, the outputs always default to off, even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 0 Sets the output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the output is on, or 0 if the output is off. OUTPut:SYNC{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will turn the 8102 SYNC output on and off. Note that for safety, the SYNC output always defaults to off, even if the last instrument setting before power down was on Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 0 Will set the SYNC output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the SYNC output is on, or 0 if the SYNC output is off. OUTPut:SYNC:POSition<position>(?) Description This command will program the 8102 SYNC position. This command is active in arbitrary (USER) mode only. 5-15 8101/8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <position> 0 to 1e6-1 Numeric (Integer only) 0 Will set the SYNC position in waveform points. The sync position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum. The range is extended to 2e6-1 when option 2 is installed. 512k memory size is standard. Response The 8102 will return the present SYNC position value OUTPut:SYNC:SOURce{1|2}(?) Description This command will program the 8102 source of the SYNC output. Parameters Range Type Default Description 1-2 Discrete 1 Will set the source for the SYNC output. 1 selects channel 1 as the source; 2 selects channel 2 as the source. Response The 8102 will return the present SYNC source value OUTPut:FILTer{NONE|25M|50MH|60M|120M}(?) Description This command will select which filter is connected to the 8102 output. Observe the following restrictions when you try to use this command: 1) Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform. In fact, the default waveform shape is sine. Therefore, filter selection will be available for use only after you select a different waveform, or change the output mode to use. 2) Filters are placed before the output amplifier. Therefore, do not expect the filters to remove in-band amplifier harmonics and spurious. Parameters Name Type Default Description None Discrete None Disables all filters at the output path. This option cannot be selected when standard waveform is generated 25M Discrete Connects a 25MHz, Bessel type filter, to the output path 50M Discrete Connects a 50MHz, Bessel type filter, to the output path 5-16 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands 5 65M Discrete Connects a 25MHz, Elliptic type filter, to the output path 120M Discrete Connects a 120MHz, Elliptic type filter, to the output path Response The 8102 will return NONE, 25M, 50M, 60M, or 120M depending on the type of filter presently connected to the output. ROSCillator:SOURce{INTernal|EXTernal}(?) Description This command will select the reference source for the sample clock generator. Parameters Name Type Default Description INTernal Discrete INT Selects an internal source. The internal source could be either the standard 100ppm oscillator, or the optional 1ppm TCXO EXTernal Discrete Activates the external reference input. An external reference must be connected to the 8102 for it to continue normal operation Response The 8102 will return INT, or EXT depending on the present 8102 setting. FREQuency{<freq>|MINimum|MAXimum}(?) Description This command modifies the frequency of the standard waveforms in units of hertz (Hz). It has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <freq> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 1e6 Will set the frequency of the standard waveform in units of Hz. Although the display resolution for the frequency setting is 9 digits only, the frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits. The accuracy of the instrument however, can only be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability <MINimum> Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to the lowest possible frequency (10e-3). <MAXimum > Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency (100e6). 5-17 8101/8102 User Manual Response The 8102 will return the present frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). FREQuency:RASTer{<sclk>|MINimum|MAXimum}(?) Description This command modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second (S/s). It has no affect on standard waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <sclk> 1.5 to 250e6 Numeric 1e7 Will set the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of S/s. Although the display resolution for the frequency setting is 9 digits only, the frequency command can be used with resolutions up to 14 digits. The accuracy of the instrument however, can only be tested to this accuracy using an external reference that provides the necessary accuracy and stability <MINimum> Discrete Will set the sample clock frequency to the lowest possible frequency (1.5). <MAXimum > Discrete Will set the frequency of the standard waveform to the highest possible frequency (300e6). Response The 8102 will return the present sample clock frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100MHz would be returned as 100e6 – positive numbers are unsigned). VOLTage{<ampl>|MINimum|MAXimum}(?) Description This command programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform. The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 50Ω. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <ampl> 16e-3 to 16e0 Numeric 5 Will set the amplitude of the output waveform in units of volts. Amplitude setting is always peak to peak. Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset + amplitude does not exceed the specified window. <MINimum> Discrete Will set the amplitude to the lowest possible level (16mV). MAXimum> Discrete Will set the amplitude to the highest possible level (16V). 5-18 Remote Programming Reference Instrument Control Commands 5 Response The 8102 will return the present amplitude value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mV would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). VOLTage:OFFSet<offs>(?) Description This command programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform. The offset is calibrated when the source impedance is 50Ω. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <offs> -7.992 to 7.992 Numeric 0 Will set the offset of the output waveform in units of volts. Offset and amplitude settings are independent providing that the offset + amplitude does not exceed the specified window. Response The 8102 will return the present offset value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mV would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). PHASe:OFFSet<phase_offs>(?) Description This command programs the start phase offset between channels 1 and 2 in units of waveform points. Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <phase_offs> 0 to 1e6-1 Numeric (Integer only) 0 Will set the phase offset between the two channels. Channel 1 trails channel 2 edge. The range is extended to 2e6-1 when option 2 is installed. 512k is standard. Response The 8102 will return the present phase offset value. 5-19 8101/8102 User Manual FUNCTion:MODE{FIXed|USER|MODulated|PULSe}(?) Description This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector. It also selects one for the auxiliary functions from: digital pulse generator Parameters Name Type Default Description FIXed Discrete FIX Selects the standard waveform shapes. There is an array of waveforms that is built into the program. You can find these waveform shapes in the standard waveforms section. USER Discrete Selects the arbitrary waveform shapes. Arbitrary waveforms must be loaded to the 8102 memory before they can be replayed. You can find information on arbitrary waveforms in the appropriate sections in this manual. MODulated Discrete Selects the modulated waveforms. There is an array of built-in modulation schemes. However, you can also build custom modulation using the arbitrary function. PULSe Discrete Selects the digital pulse generator auxiliary function. Note that when you select this function, all waveform generation of the 8102 are purged and the 8102 is transformed to behave as if it was a stand-alone pulse generator. The digital pulse generator functions and parameters can be programmed using the auxiliary commands. Response The 8102 will return FIX, USER, SEQ, MOD, COUN, PULS or HALF depending on the present 8102 setting. 5-20 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands Standard Waveforms Control Commands 5 This group is used to control the standard waveforms and their respective parameters. There is an array of standard waveforms that could be used without the need to download waveform coordinates to the instrument. You can also modify the parameters for each waveform to a shape suitable for your application. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in the Default column. Parameter range and low and high limits are listed, where applicable. Table 5-3, Instrument Control Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | PULSe | RAMP | SINC | SIN :FUNCtion :SHAPe GAUSsian | EXPonential | NOISe | DC :SINusoid :PHASe 0 to 360 0 0 to 360 0 0 to 99.99 50 :TRIangle :PHASe :SQUare :DCYCle :PULSe :DELay 0 to 99.999 10 :WIDth 0 to 99.999 10 :TRANsition [:LEADing] 0 to 99.999 10 :TRAiling 0 to 99.999 10 0 to 99.99 0 :RAMP :DELay :TRANsition [:LEADing] 0 to 99.99 60 :TRAiling 0 to 99.99 30 4 to 100 10 10 to 200 20 -100 to 100 1 -8 to 8 5 :SINC :NCYCle :GAUSsian :EXPonent :EXPonential :EXPonent :DC [:AMPLitude] 5-21 8101/8102 User Manual FUNCtion:SHAPe{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|SINC|EXPo nential| GAUSsian|NOISe|DC}(?) Description This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector. Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine waveform from the built in library. TRIangle Discrete Selects the triangular waveform from the built in library. SQUare Discrete Selects the square waveform from the built in library. PULSe Discrete Selects the pulse waveform from the built in library. RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp waveform from the built in library. SINC Discrete Selects the sinc waveform from the built in library. EXPonential Discrete Selects the exponential waveform from the built in library. GAUSsian Discrete Selects the gaussian waveform from the built in library. DC Discrete Selects the DC waveform from the built in library. NOISe Discrete Selects the noise waveform from the built in library. Response The 8102 will return SIN, TRI, SQU, PULS, RAMP, SINC, EXP, GAUS, NOIS, or DC depending on the present 8102 setting SINusoid:PHASe<phase>(?) Description This command programs start phase of the standard sine waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <phase> 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees. Sine phase can be programmable with resolution of 0.05° throughout the entire frequency range of the sine waveform. Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value. 5-22 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands 5 TRIangle:PHASe<phase>(?) Description This command programs start phase of the standard triangular waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <phase> 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase parameter in units of degrees. Triangle phase can be programmable with resolution of 0.05° throughout the entire frequency range of the triangular waveform. Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value. SQUare:DCYCle<duty_cycle>(?) Description This command programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <duty_cycle> 0 to 99.99 Numeric 50 Programs the square wave duty cycle parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present duty cycle value. PULSe:DELay<delay>(?) Description This command programs delay of the standard pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <delay> 0 to 99.999 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse delay parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present pulse delay value. 5-23 8101/8102 User Manual PULSe:WIDth<pulse_width>(?) Description This command programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <pulse_width> 0 to 99.999 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse width parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present width value. PULSe:TRANsition<rise>(?) Description This command programs pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <rise> 0 to 99.999 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling<fall>(?) Description This command programs pulse transition from high to low of the standard pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <fall> 0 to 99.999 Numeric 10 Programs the pulse fall time parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value. 5-24 5 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands RAMP:DELay<delay>(?) Description This command programs delay of the standard ramp waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <delay> 0 to 99.99 Numeric 10 Programs the ramp delay parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present ramp delay value. Ramp:TRANsition<rise>(?) Description This command programs ramp transition from low to high of the standard ramp waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <rise> 0 to 99.99 Numeric 60 Programs the pulse rise time parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value RAMP:TRANsition:TRAiling<fall>(?) Description This command programs ramp transition from high to low of the standard ramp waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <fall> 0 to 99.99 Numeric 30 Programs the ramp fall time parameter in units of percent Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value. 5-25 8101/8102 User Manual SINC:NCYCleN_cycles>(?) Description This command programs the number of “0-crossings” of the standard SINC pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <N_cycle> 4 to 100 Numeric (Integer only) 10 Programs the number of zero-crossings parameter Response The 8102 will return the present number of zero-crossing value. GAUSsian:EXPonent<exp>(?) Description This command programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <exp> 4 to 100 Numeric 20 Programs the exponent parameter Response The 8102 will return the present exponent value. EXPonential:EXPonent<exp>(?) Description This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <exp> -100 to 100 Numeric 1 Programs the exponent parameter Response The 8102 will return the present exponent value. 5-26 Remote Programming Reference Standard Waveforms Control Commands 5 DC<amplitude>(?) Description This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform. This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <amplitude> -8 to 8 Numeric 5 Programs the DC amplitude parameter Response The 8102 will return the present DC amplitude value. 5-27 8101/8102 User Manual Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands This group is used to control the arbitrary waveforms and their respective parameters. This will allow you to create segments and download waveforms. Using these commands you can also define segment size and delete some or all unwanted waveforms from your memory. Use the commands in this group to turn the digital output on and off and to download data to the digital pattern buffer. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in the Default column. Parameter range and low and high limits are listed, where applicable. Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points, which are stored in a dedicated waveform memory. Each data point has a vertical resolution of 16 bits (65536 points), i.e., each sample is placed on the vertical axis with a precision of 1/65536. The Model 8102 has 512k waveform memory capacity. Each horizontal point has a unique address - the first being 00000 and the last depends on the memory option. In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required, the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments. When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms, the clock samples the data points (one at a time) from address 0 to the last address. The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter. Unlike the built-in standard waveforms, arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument's memory. Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory. An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs. Arbitrary memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words. The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory depends on the option that is installed in your instrument. The various options are listed in Chapter 1 of this manual. If you purchased the 8102 with in its basic configuration, you should expect to have 512k words to load waveforms. Waveforms are created using small sections of the arbitrary memory. The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments (up to 10k) and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment, each having a unique length. Minimum segment size is 16 points. Information on how to partition the memory, define segment length and download waveform data to the 8102 is given in the following paragraphs. 5-28 Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands 5 Table 5-4, Arbitrary Waveforms Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Range Default :TRACe [:DATA] <data_array> :DEFine <1 to 10k>,<16 to 1(2)e6> (<segment_#>,<size>) 1 :DELete [:NAME] 1 to 10k :ALL :SELect 1 to 10k 1 :SEGMent [:DATA] <data_array> TRACe#<header><binary_block> Description This command will download waveform data to the 8102 memory. Waveform data is loaded to the 8102 using high-speed binary transfer. A special command is defined by IEEE-STD-488.2 for this purpose. Highspeed binary transfer allows any 8-bit bytes (including extended ASCII code) to be transmitted in a message. This command is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data. As an example, the next command will download to the generator an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe#42048<binary_block> This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data (1024 waveform points) into the active memory segment. The <header> is interpreted this way: • The ASCII "#" ($23) designates the start of the binary data block. • "4" designates the number of digits that follow. • "2048" is the even number of bytes to follow. The generator accepts binary data as 16-bit integers, which are sent in two-byte words. Therefore, the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform. For example, 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000 points. The IEEE-STD-488.2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5-1. 5-29 8101/8102 User Manual "#" non-zero ASCII digit low byte (binary) ASCII digit high byte (binary) Start of Data Block Number of to Follow 2 Byts Per Data Point Byte Count: 2 x Number of Figure 5-1, Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set. This way, carriage-return (CR – 0dH) and line feed (LF – 0aH) characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data. • <binary_block> Represents waveform data. The waveform data is made of 16-bit words however, the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8-bit words only. Therefore, the data has to be prepared as 16-bit words and rearranged as two 8-bit words before it can be used by the 8102 as waveform data points. The following description shows you how to prepare the data for downloading to the 8102. There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data: 1. Each channel has its own waveform memory. Therefore, make sure you selected the correct active channel before you download data to the generator 2. Waveform data points have 16-bit values 3. Data point range is 0 to 65,535 decimal 4. Data point 0 to data point 65,535 corresponds to full-scale amplitude setting. Figure 5-2 shows how to initially prepare the 16-bit word for a waveform data point. Data has to be further manipulated to a final format that the instrument can accept and process as waveform point. MSB D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 LSB low-byte high-byte D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Figure 5-2, 16-bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation Figure 5-3 shows the same 16-bit word as in Figure 5-2, except the high and low bytes are swapped. This is the correct format that the 8102 expects as waveform point data. The first byte to be sent to the generator is the low-byte and then high-byte. 5-30 Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands low-byte D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 5 high-byte D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 Figure 5-3, 16-bit Waveform Data Point Representation Parameters Name Type Description <header> Discrete Contains information on the size of the binary block that contains waveform coordinates. <binary_block> Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the waveform coordinates. TRACe:DEFine<segment_number>,<length> Description Use this command to attach size to a specific memory segment. The final size of the arbitrary memory is 512k points. The memory can be partitioned to smaller segments, up to 10k segments. This function allows definition of segment size. Total length of memory segments cannot exceed the size of the waveform memory. NOTE The 8102 operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data. Therefore, segment size can be programmed in numbers evenly divisible by four only. For example, 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block. 2002 is not a multiple of 4, therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <segment_ number> 1 to 10k Numeric (integer only) 1 Selects the segment number of which will be programmed using this command <length> 16 to 1(2)M Numeric (integer only) Programs the size of the selected segment. Minimum segment length is 16 points, the maximum is limited by 512k 5-31 8101/8102 User Manual TRACe:DELete<segment_number> Description This command will delete a segment. The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform will be equal or smaller in size to the deleted segment. If the deleted segment is the last segment, then the size of another waveform written to the same segment is not limited. For example, let consider two segments, the first being a 1000-point waveform and the second with 100 points. If you delete segment 1, you can reprogram another waveform to segment 1 with size to 1000 points. If you reprogram segment 1 with 1004 points, the instrument will generate an error and will not accept this waveform. On the other hand, if you delete segment 2, which was the last segment you programmed, then you can reprogram this segment with waveforms having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <segment_ number> 1 to 10k Numeric (integer only) 1 Selects the segment number of which will be deleted TRACe:DELete:ALL Description This command will delete all segments and will clear the entire waveform memory. This command is particularly important in case you want to de-fragment the entire waveform memory and start building your waveform segments from scratch. TIP The TRAC:DEL:ALL command does not re-write the memory so, whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery. The TRAC:DEL:ALL command removes all stop bits and clears the segment table. You can recover memory segments by using the TRAC:DEF command. You can also use this technique to resize, or combine waveform segments. TRACe:SELect<segment_number> Description This command will select the active waveform segment for the output. By selecting the active segment you are performing two function: 1. Successive :TRAC commands will affect the selected segment 2. The SYNC output will be assigned to the selected segment. 5-32 Remote Programming Reference Arbitrary Waveforms Control Commands 5 Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <segment_ number> 1 to 10k Numeric (integer only) 1 Selects the active segment number Response The 8102 will return the active segment number. SEGment#<header><binary_block> Description This command will partition the waveform memory to smaller segments and will speed up memory segmentation. The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then just use this command to split the waveform to the appropriate memory segments. In this way, there is no need to define and download waveforms to individual segments. Using this command, segment table data is loaded to the 8102 using high-speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command. High-speed binary transfer allows any 8-bit bytes (including extended ASCII code) to be transmitted in a message. This command is particularly useful for large number of segment. As an example, the next command will generate three segments with 12 bytes of data that contains segment size information. SEGment#212<binary_block> This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data (3 segments) into the segment table buffer. The <header> is interpreted this way: • The ASCII "#" ($23) designates the start of the binary data block. • "2" designates the number of digits that follow. • "12" is the number of bytes to follow. This number must divide by 4. The generator accepts binary data as 32-bit integers, which are sent in two-byte words. Therefore, the total number of bytes is always 4 times the number of segments. For example, 36 bytes are required to download 9 segments to the segment table. The IEEE-STD-488.2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5-1. The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set. This way, carriage-return (CR – 0dH) and line feed (LF – 0aH) characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data. The segment table data is made of 32-bit words however, the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8-bit words only. Therefore, the data has to be prepared as 32-bit words and rearranged as six 8-bit words before it can be used by the 8102 as segment table data. Figure 5-4 shows how to prepare the 32-bit work for the segment start address and size. There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data: Figure 5-4, Segment Address and Size Example 5-33 8101/8102 User Manual 1. Each channel has its own segment table buffer. Therefore, make sure you selected the correct active channel (with the INST:SEL command) before you download segment table data to the generator 2. Minimum number of segments is 1; maximum number of segments is 16k 3. Maximum segment size depends on your installed option. With the basic 8102 you can program maximum 512k in one segment. 4. Segment table data has 32-bit values of which are used for segment size. Therefore, Data for each segment must have 4 bytes 5. The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 6. The Model 8102 has no control over data sent to its segment table during data transfer. Therefore, wrong data and/or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partition Parameters Name Type Description <binary_block> Binary Block of binary data that contains information on the segment table. 5-34 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 This group is used to control the modulated waveforms and their respective parameters. Note that the modulation can be turned off to create continuous carrier waveform (CW). The following modulation schemes can be selected and controlled: FM, AM, FSK, PSK, Sweep. The modulation commands are summarized in Table 5-5. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in the Default column. Parameter range and low and high limits are listed, where applicable. Table 5-5, Modulated Waveforms Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default OFF |FM | AM | SWEep | FSK | ASK | PSK OFF [:SOURce] :MODulation :TYPE :CARRier [:FREQuency] 10 to 100e6 1e6 :BASeline CARRier | DC CARR :LOAD :DEMO Frequency Modulation Commands :FM :DEViation 10.0e-3 to 100e6 100e3 :FUNCtion :SHAPe :FREQuency :RASTer SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | RAMP | ARB SIN 10e-3 to 350e3) 10e3 1 to 2.5e6) 1e6 10e-3 to 100e6) 1e6 :MARKer [:FREQuency] :DATA <data_array> Amplitude Modulation Commands :AM :FUNCtion :SHAPe SINusoid | TRIangle | SQUare | RAMP SIN 10e-3 to 1e6 10e3 :MODulation :FREQuency :DEPTh 0 to 100 50 Sweep Modulation Commands :SWEep [:FREQuency] :STARt 10 to 100.0e6 :STOP 10 to 100e6 10e3 1e6 :TIME 1.4e-6 to 40.0 1e-3 :DIRection UP | DOWN UP :SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic LIN 10 to 100e6 505e3 :MARKer [:FREQuency] 5-35 8101/8102 User Manual Table 55-5, Model 8102 SCPI Commands List Summary (continued) Keyword Parameter Form Default [:SOURce] Frequency Shift Keying Modulation Commands :FSK :FREQuency 10e-3 to 100e6 100e3 :BAUD :SHIFted 1 to 10e6 10e3 :MARKer 1 to 4000 1 :DATA <data_array> [:SOURce] :PSK :PHASe [:STARt] 0 to 360 0 :SHIFted 0 to 360 180 :RATE 1 to 10e6 10e3 :DATA <data_array> :MARKer 1 to 4000 1 :BAUD 1 to 10e6 10e3 OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :CARRier :STATe 5-36 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 MODulation:TYPE{OFF|FM|AM|SWEeep|FSK|PSK}(?) Description This command will select the modulation type. All modulation types are internal, thus external signals are not required for producing modulation. Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Modulation off is a special mode where the output generates continuous, non-modulated sinusoidal carrier waveform (CW). FM Discrete This turns on the FM function. Program the FM parameters to fine tune the function for your application. AM Discrete This turns on the AM function. Program the AM parameters to fine tune the function for your application. SWEep Discrete This turns on the sweep function. Program the sweep parameters to fine tune the function for your application. FSK Discrete This turns on the FSK function. Program the FSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application. PSK Discrete This turns on the PSK function. Program the PSK parameters to fine tune the function for your application. Response The 8102 will return OFF, FM, AM, SWE, FSK, PSK depending on the present modulation type setting. 5-37 8101/8102 User Manual MODulation:CARRier<frequency>(?) Description This command programs the CW frequency. Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sine waveform. The CW frequency setting is valid for all modulation types. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <frequency> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 1e6 Programs the frequency of the carrier waveform in units of Hz. Note that the CW waveform is sine only and its frequency setting is separate to the standard sine waveform. Response The 8102 will return the current carrier frequency value. MODulation:CARRier:BASeline{CARRier|DC}(?) Description This command will program the carrier baseline when the modulation is used in triggered mode. Parameters Name Type Default Description CARRier Discrete CARR This selects the carrier as the baseline for the modulation function, when operating in one of the interrupted run modes. The output will generate continuous, none modulated sinusoidal waveform (CW) until triggered, upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous CW. DC Discrete This selects DC level as the baseline for the modulation function, when operating in one of the interrupted run modes. The output will generate continuous DC until triggered, upon trigger will generate the modulated waveform and then resume generating continuous DC level. Response The 8102 will return CARR, or DC depending on the present carrier baseline setting. FM Modulation Programming 5-38 Use the following command for programming the FM parameters. FM control is internal. There are two types of waveforms that can be used as the modulating waveforms: Standard and Arbitrary. The standard waveforms are built in a library of waveforms and could be used anytime without external control. The arbitrary waveforms Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 must be loaded into a special FM arbitrary waveform memory and only then can be used as a modulating waveform. FM:DEViation<deviation>(?) Description This programs the deviation range around the carrier frequency. The deviation range is always symmetrical about the carrier frequency. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <deviation> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 100e3 Programs the deviation range around the carrier frequency in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present deviation frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). FM:FUNCtion:SHAPe(SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|RAMP|ARB}(?) Description This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform. Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRIangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform ARB Discrete Selects an arbitrary waveform as the modulating shape. The waveform must be designed and downloaded to the FM arbitrary modulating waveform memory before one can use this option. Response The 8102 will return SIN, TRI, SQU, RAMP, or ARB depending on the selected function shape setting. FM:FREQuency<fm_freq>(?) Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built-in standard modulating waveform library. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description 5-39 8101/8102 User Manual <fm_freq> 10e-3 to 350e3 Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in units of Hz. The frequency of the built-in standard modulating waveforms only is affected. Response The 8102 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). FM:FREQuency:RASTer<arb_fm_freq>(?) Description This command will set the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary modulating waveform. Arbitrary modulating waveforms must be created in an external utility and downloaded to the FM arbitrary waveform memory before this function can be used. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <arb_fm_freq > 1 to 2.5e6 Numeric 1e6 Programs the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary modulating waveform in units of S/s. Response The 8102 will return the present sample clock of the arbitrary modulating waveform value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). FM:MARKer<frequency>(?) Description This function programs marker frequency position. FM marker can be placed inside the following range: (carrier frequency ± deviation frequency / 2). The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <frequency> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 1e6 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present marker frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). 5-40 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 Use the following command for programming the AM parameters. AM control is internal. The commands for programming the amplitude modulation function are described below. Note that the carrier waveform frequency (CW) setting is common to all modulation schemes. AM modulation Programming AM:FUNCtion:SHAPe(SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|RAMP}(?) Description This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform. Parameters Name Type Default Description SINusoid Discrete SIN Selects the sine shape as the modulating waveform TRIangle Discrete Select the triangular shape as the modulating waveform SQUare Discrete Select the square shape as the modulating waveform RAMP Discrete Selects the ramp shape as the modulating waveform Response The 8102 will return SIN, TRI, SQU, or RAMP depending on the selected function shape setting. AM:FREQuency<am_freq>(?) Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built-in standard modulating waveform library. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <am_freq> 10e-3 to 1e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the frequency of the modulating waveform in units of Hz. The frequency of the built-in standard modulating waveforms only is affected. Response The 8102 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). AM:DEPth<depth>(?) Description This command will set the modulating wave frequency for the built-in standard modulating waveform library. 5-41 8101/8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <depth> 0 to 100 Numeric 50 Programs the depth of the modulating waveform in units of percent. Response The 8102 will return the present modulating depth value. Sweep Modulation Programming Use the following command for programming the sweep parameters. Sweep control is internal. The frequency will sweep from start to stop frequencies at an interval determined by the sweep time value and controlled by a step type determined by the sweep step parameter. There are two sweep modes: Linear, where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is linear and Logarithmic, where the step of which the generator increments from start to stop frequency is logarithmic The commands for programming the frequency sweep function are described below. SWEep:STARt<start_freq>(?) Description This specifies the sweep start frequency. The 8102 will normally sweep from start to stop frequencies however, if the sweep direction is revered, the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies. The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform frequency range. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <start_freq> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the sweep start frequency. Sweep start is programmed in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present sweep start frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). SWEep:STOP<stop_freq>(?) Description This specifies the sweep stop frequency. The 8102 will normally sweep from start to stop frequencies however, if the sweep direction is revered, the output will sweep from stop to start frequencies. The start and stop frequencies may be programmed freely throughout the frequency of the standard waveform 5-42 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 frequency range. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <stop_freq> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 1e6 Programs the sweep stop frequency. Sweep stop is programmed in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present sweep stop frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). SWEep:TIMe<time>(?) Description This specifies the time that will take the 8102 to sweep from start to stop frequencies. The time does not depend on the sweep boundaries as it is automatically adjusted by the software to the required interval. At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform maintains the sweep stop frequency setting except if the 8102 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <time> 1.4e-6 to 40 Numeric 1e-3 Programs the sweep programmed in units of s. time. Sweep time is Response The 8102 will return the present sweep time. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100ms would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). SWEep:DIRection(UP|DOWN}(?) Description This specifies if the 8102 output will sweep from start-to-stop (UP) or from stop-to-start (DOWN) frequencies. Sweep time does not affect the sweep direction and frequency limits. At the end of the sweep cycle the output waveform normally maintains the sweep stop frequency setting but will maintain the start frequency, if the DOWN option is selected except if the 8102 is in continuous run mode where the sweep repeats itself continuously. Parameters Name Type Default Description UP Discrete UP Selects the sweep up direction DOWN Discrete Select the sweep down direction Response The 8102 will return UP, or DOWN depending on the selected direction setting. 5-43 8101/8102 User Manual SWEep:SPACing(LINear|LOGarithmic}(?) Description This specifies the sweep step type. Two options are available: logarithmic or linear. In linear, the incremental steps between the frequencies are uniform throughout the sweep range. Logarithmic type defines logarithmic spacing throughout the sweep start and stop settings. Parameters Name Type Default Description LINear Discrete LIN Selects the linear sweep spacing LOGarithmic Discrete Select the logarithmic sweep spacing Response The 8102 will return LIN, or LOG depending on the selected spacing setting. SWEep:MARKer<frequency>(?) Description This function programs marker frequency position. Sweep marker can be placed in between the start and the stop frequencies. The marker pulse is output from the SYNC output connector. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <frequency> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 505e3 Programs the marker frequency position in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present marker frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). 5-44 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 Use the following command for programming the FSK parameters. FSK control is internal. The frequency will shift from carrier to shifted frequency setting at a rate determined by the baud value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the FSK data table. The commands for programming the frequency shift keying function are described below. Note that the carrier waveform frequency (CW) setting is common to all modulation schemes. FSK Modulation Programming FSK:FREQuency:SHIFted<shift_freq>(?) Description This programs the shifted frequency. The frequency shifts when the pointer in the data array points to “1”. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <shift_freq> 10e-3 to 100e6 Numeric 100e3 Programs the shifted frequency value in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present shifted frequency value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). FSK:FREQuency:BAUD<baud>(?) Description This allows the user to select FSK word rate. The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the FSK data array are clocked causing the output frequency to hop from carrier to shifted frequency values and visa versa. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <baud> 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the frequency shifts from carrier to shifted frequency in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present baud value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). 5-45 8101/8102 User Manual FSK:FREQuency:MARKer<index>(?) Description Programs where on the data stream the 8102 will generate a pulse, designated as FSK marker, or index point. The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector. Note that if you intend to program marker position, you must do it before you load the FSK data list. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <index> 1 to 4000 Numeric (integer only) 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position. Response The 8102 will return the present marker position. FSK:DATA<fsk_data> Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 8102 to hop from carrier to shifted frequency and visa versa. Data format is a string of "0" and "1" which define when the output generates carrier frequency and when it shifts frequency to the FSK value. "0" defines carrier frequency,"1" defines shifted frequency. Note that if you intend to program marker position, you must do it before you load the FSK data list. Below you can see how an FSK data table is constructed. The sample below shows a list of 10 shifts. The 8102 will step through this list, outputting either carrier or shifted frequencies, depending on the data list: Zero will generate carrier frequency and One will generate shifted frequency. Note that the waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed. Sample FSK Data Array 0111010001 Parameters Name Type Description <fsk_data> ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to shift from carrier to shifted frequency and visa versa. PSK Modulation Programming 5-46 Use the following command for programming the PSK parameters. The following commands will be divided into two groups: PSK commands and (n)PSK commands. The PSK function can shift from start to shifted phase setting, within the range of 0 to 360°, at a frequency determined by the rate value and controlled by a sequence of bits in the PSK data table. The (n)PSK functions use pre-defined table settings. In case the standard table do not suit the Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 application you can design your own (n)PSK data using the User PSK data table entry option. Note that the carrier waveform frequency (CW) setting is common to all modulation schemes. PSK:PHASe:<start_phase>(?) Description This programs the start phase of the carrier waveform. The start phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to “0”. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <start_phase> 0 to 360 Numeric 0 Programs the start phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees. Response The 8102 will return the present start phase value. PSK:PHASe:SHIFted<shift_phase>(?) Description This programs the shifted phase. The phase shifts when the pointer in the data array points to “1”. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <shift_phase> 0 to 360 Numeric 180 Programs the shift phase for the carrier waveform in units of degrees. Response The 8102 will return the present shift phase value. PSK:RATE<rate>(?) Description This allows the user to select PSK word rate. The word rate is the interval of which the bit streams in the PSK data array are clocked, causing the output phase to hop from start to shifted phase values and visa versa. Note that this command is dedicated for programming the PSK modulation function only. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <baud> 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the rate of which the phase shifts from start to shifted frequency in units of Hz. Response 5-47 8101/8102 User Manual The 8102 will return the present baud value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). PSK:DATA<psk_data> Description Loads the data stream that will cause the 8102 to hop from phase to phase. Data format is a string of "0" and "1" which define when the output generates the various phases. The size of the data word depends on the PSK function. For PSK and BPSK there are only two bits - "0" defines start phase,"1" defines shifted phase. 16PSK has 4 bits of which 0000 defines the first phase vector 0001 defines the second, 0000 the third and 1111 defines the 16th phase vector. Note that if you intend to program marker position, you must do it before you load the PSK data list. Below you can see how an PSK data table and a 16PSK data table are constructed. The PSK data table sample below shows a list of 10 shifts. The 8102 will step through this list, outputting either start or shifted phases, depending on the data list: Zero will generate start phase and One will generate shifted phase. Note that the output waveform is always sinewave and that the last cycle is always completed. The 16PSK data array has 10 shifts as well except this time the shifts are a bit more complex. Sample PSK Data Array 0111010001 Sample 16PSK Data Array 0000 0100 1010 0111 1111 0001 0010 0111 0101 1111 Parameters Name Type Description <psk_data> ASCII Block of ASCII data that contains information for the generator when to step from one phase setting to another. PSK:MARKer<index>(?) Description Programs where on the data stream the 8102 will generate a pulse, designated as PSK marker, or index point. The marker pulse is generated at the SYNC output connector. Note that if you intend to program marker position, you must do it before you load the PSK data list. The PSK:MARK command is common to all PSK modulation functions. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <index> 1 to 4000 Numeric (integer only) 1 Programs a marker pulse at an index bit position. Response The 8102 will return the present marker position. 5-48 Remote Programming Reference Modulated Waveforms Control Commands 5 PSK:BAUD<baud>(?) Description This allows the user to select (n)PSK baud. The baud is the interval of which the symbols stream in the (n)PSK data array as they are clocked with the baud generator. Note that this command is dedicated for programming the (n)PSK modulation function only and will have no effect on the PSK function. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <baud> 1 to 10e6 Numeric 10e3 Programs the baud of which the symbols stream in the (n)PSK data table. Baud is programmed in units of Hz. Response The 8102 will return the present baud value. The returned value will be in standard scientific format (for example: 100mHz would be returned as 100e-3 – positive numbers are unsigned). PSK:CARRier:STATe{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will toggle the carrier waveform (CW) on and off. This command affects all (n)PSK function and has no effect on the PSK function. The carrier off function is especially useful as direct input for I & Q vector generators that need the digital information only and supply the carrier information separately. Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 1 Sets the carrier output on and off Response The 8102 will return 1 if the output is on, or 0 if the output is off. 5-49 8101/8102 User Manual Run Mode Commands The Run Mode Commands group is used to synchronize device actions with external events. These commands control the trigger modes of the Model 8102. The generator can be placed in Triggered, Gated or Burst mode. Trigger source is selectable from an external source, an internal re-trigger generator or a software trigger. Optional nodes were omitted from these commands. The Run Mode settings affect all waveform shapes equally except when using the modulated waveforms. In the case of modulated waveform, the output idles on the carrier waveform until stimulated to output a modulation cycle or burst of cycles. Additional information on the run mode options and how the 8102 behaves in the various run mode options is given in Chapter 3. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in bold typeface. Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable. Table 5-6, Run Mode Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :INITiate [:IMMediately] :CONTinuous :TRIGger [:IMMediate] :BURSt [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :COUNt 1 to 1000000 1 :DELay [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :TIMe 200e-9 to 20 200e-9 OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 -5 to 5 1.6 BUS | EXTernal | MIXed EXT POSitive | NEGative POS :GATE [:STATe] :LEVel :SOURce [:ADVance] :SLOPe :RETRigger [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :TIMe 200e-9 to 20 200e-9 INITiate:CONTinuous{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will set the output in continuous operation and interrupted operation. The run mode commands will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to interrupted operation. 5-50 Remote Programming Reference Run Mode Commands 5 Parameters Name Type Default Description ON Discrete ON Disables all interrupted modes and forces the continuous run mode OFF Discrete Select the interrupted run mode. While in this switch option, you can program the 8102 to operate in triggered, gated, or counted burst run modes. Response The 8102 will return OFF, or ON depending on the selected option. TRIGger:BURSt{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will toggle the counted burst run mode on and off. This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT:CONT OFF. Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the burst run mode off. ON Discrete Enables the counted burst run mode. Burst count is programmable using the TRIG:BURS:COUN command. Response The 8102 will return OFF, or ON depending on the selected option. TRIGger:BURSt:COUNt<burst>(?) Description This function sets the number of cycles when the Burst Mode is on. Use the init:cont off;:trig:burs on commands to select the Burst Mode. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <burst> 1 to 1M Numeric (integer only) 1 Programs the burst count. Response The 8102 will return the present burst count value. 5-51 8101/8102 User Manual TRIGger:DELay{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will toggle the delayed trigger mode on and off. This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT:CONT OFF. Note: System delay must always be considered when using an external trigger. System delay is measured from a valid trigger input to the transition of the first waveform point. It has a fixed period that adds to the programmed trigger delay value. Consult Appendix A for the system delay specification. Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the delayed trigger mode off. ON Discrete Enables the delayed trigger mode. Response The 8102 will return OFF, or ON depending on the selected option. TRIGger:DELayTime<time>(?) Description The trigger delay time parameter defines the time that will elapse from a valid trigger signal to the initiation of the first output waveform. Trigger delay can be turned ON and OFF using the trig:del command. The trigger delay time command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode. Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init:cont off command. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <time> 200e-9 to 20 Numeric 200e-9 Programs the trigger delay time. Response The 8102 will return the present trigger delay time value. TRIGger:GATE{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will toggle the gate run mode on and off. This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT:CONT OFF. Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the gate run mode off. ON Discrete Enables the gated run mode. Response The 8102 will return OFF, or ON depending on the selected option. 5-52 Remote Programming Reference Run Mode Commands 5 TRIGger:LEVel<level>(?) Description The trigger level command sets the threshold level at the trigger input connector. The trigger level command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode. Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init:cont off command. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <level> -5 to +5 Numeric 1.6 Programs the trigger level. The value affects the rear panel input only. Response The 8102 will return the present burst count value. TRIGger:SOURce:ADVance{EXTernal|BUS|MIXed}(?) Description This selects the source from where the 8102 will be stimulated to generate waveforms. The source advance command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode. Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init:cont off command. Parameters Name Type Default Description EXTernal Discrete EXT Activates the rear panel TRIG IN input and the front panel MAN TRIG button. Either a front panel button push or a legal signal which will be applied to the rear panel input will stimulate the 8102 to generate waveforms. BUS commands are ignored. BUS Discrete Selects the remote controller as the trigger source. Only software commands are accepted while rear and front panel signals are ignored MIXed Discrete Hardware triggers are ignored until. First output cycle is initiated using a software command. Subsequent output cycles are initiated using one of the following: rear panel TRIG IN, or front panel MAN TRIG button. Response The 8102 will return EXT, BUS, or MIX depending on the selected trigger source advance setting. TRIGger:SLOPe{POSitive|NEGative}(?) Description The trigger slope command selects the sensitive edge of the trigger signal that is applied to the TRIG IN 5-53 8101/8102 User Manual connector. The Model 8102 can be made sensitive to either the positive or negative transitions. Positive going transitions will trigger the generator when the POS option is selected. Negative transitions will trigger the generator when the NEG option is selected. In Gated mode, two transitions in the same direction are required to gate on and off the output. The trigger slope command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode. Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init:cont off command. Parameters Name Type Default Description POSitive Discrete POS Selects the positive going edge. NEGative Discrete Selects the negative going edge. Response The 8102 will return POS, or NEG depending on the selected trigger slope setting. RETRigger{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will toggle the re-trigger mode on and off. This command will affect the 8102 only after it will be set to INIT:CONT OFF. Parameters Name Type Default Description OFF Discrete OFF Turns the re-trigger mode off. ON Discrete Enables the re-trigger mode. Response The 8102 will return OFF, or ON depending on the selected option. RETRigger:Time<time>(?) Description This parameter specifies the amount of time that will elapse between the end of the delivery of the waveform cycle and the beginning of the next waveform cycle. Re-trigger can be initiated from any of the selected advance options. The re-trigger command will affect the generator only after it has been programmed to operate in interrupted run mode. Modify the 8102 to interrupted run mode using the init:cont off command. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <time> 200e-9 to 20 Numeric 200e-9 Programs the re-trigger period. Response The 8102 will return the present re-trigger period value. 5-54 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands Auxiliary Commands 5 The auxiliary commands control auxiliary functions that are not directly related to the main function of the arbitrary waveform generator however, constitute an important part of operating the 8102. These commands can transform the 8102 into a stand-alone pulse generator. The auxiliary commands are listed in Table 5-7. Factory defaults after *RST are shown in bold typeface. Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable. Table 5-7, Auxiliary Commands Keyword Parameter Form Default Digital Pulse Commands :AUXiliary :PULSe :DELay 0 to 10 0 :DOUBle [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 0 :DELay 0 to 1e3 1e-3 0 to 1e3 1e-3 -7.992 to 8 5 :HIGH :LEVel :HIGH :LOW -8 to 7.992 0 80e-9 to 1e6 (80e-9 to 2e6 with the 2 M option) 10e-3 :POLARity NORMal | COMPlemented | INVerted NORM [:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :PERiod :TRANsition [:LEADing 0 to 1e3 1e-3 :TRAiling] 0 to 1e3 1e-3 5-55 8101/8102 User Manual Digital Pulse Programming Use the following command for programming the pulse parameters. The pulse is created digitally however, it closely simulates an analog pulse generator so pulse parameters are programmed just as they would be programmed on a dedicated pulse generator instrument. Just bear in mind that since this is a digital instrument, there are some limitations to the pulse design that evolve from the fact that the best resolution is one sample clock interval and also, keep in mind that the pulse is created digitally in the arbitrary memory and therefore, its smallest incremental step has a maximum value limitation as specified in Appendix A. AUXiliary:PULse:DELay<delay>(?) Description This command will program the delayed interval of which the output idles on the low level amplitude until the first transition to high level amplitude. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <delay> 0 to 10 Numeric 0 Will set the delay time interval in units of seconds. Note that the sum of all parameters, including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first and then all other pulse parameters. Response The 8102 will return the pulse delay value in units of seconds. AUXiliary:PULse:DOUBle{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description This command will turn the double pulse mode on and off. The double pulse mode duplicates the first pulse parameters at a delayed interval set by the double pulse delay value. Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 0 Sets the double pulse mode on and off Response The 8102 will return 0, or 1 depending on the present double mode setting. 5-56 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands 5 AUXiliary:PULse:DOUBle:DELay<d_delay>(?) Description This command will program the delay between two adjacent pulses when the double mode is selected. Otherwise, the double pulse delay has no effect on the pulse structure. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <d_delay> 0 to 1e3 Numeric 2e-3 Will set the delay between two adjacent pulses for the double pulse mode in units of seconds. Note that the sum of all parameters, including the pulse delay time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters. Response The 8102 will return the present double pulse delay value in units of seconds. AUXiliary:PULse:HIGH<high>(?) Description This command will program the interval the pulse will dwell on the high level value. Although they have similar interpretation, the high time and pulse width are significantly different. The standard terminology of pulse width defines the width of the pulse at the mid-point of its peak-to-peak amplitude level. Therefore, if you change the rise and fall time, the pulse width is changing accordingly. The digital pulse high time parameter defines how long the pulse will dwell on the high level so even if you change the rise and fall times, the high time remains constant. The pulse high time is programmed in units of seconds. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <high> 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e-3 Will set the width of the high time for the pulse shape in units of seconds. Note that the sum of all parameters, including the high time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters. Response The 8102 will return the present high time value in units of seconds AUXiliary:PULse:LEVel:HIGH<high>(?) Description This command will program the high level for the pulse shape. Note that the same level is retained for the second pulse in the double pulse mode. 5-57 8101/8102 User Manual Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <high> -7.992 to 8 Numeric 5 Will set the pulse high level in units of volts. Note that the high level setting must be higher than the low level setting. Also note that high to low level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV. Response The 8102 will return the present low level value in unit of volts. AUXiliary:PULse:LEVel:LOW<low>(?) Description This command will program the phase offset between two adjacent instruments. Normally this command should be used on the slave unit. The phase offset control provides means of generating multiple signals with phase offset between them. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <low> -8 to 7.992 Numeric 0 Will set the pulse low level in units of volts. Note that the low level setting must be smaller than the high level setting. Also note that low to high level value must be equal or larger than 8 mV. Response The 8102 will return the present high level value in unit of volts. AUXiliary:PULse:PERiod<period>(?) Description This command will program the pulse repetition rate (period). Note that the sum of all parameters, including the pulse delay, rise, high and fall times must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed first before all other pulse parameters. Note that by selecting the double pulse mode, the pulse period remains unchanged. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <period> 80e-9 to 1e6 Numeric 10e-3 Will program the period of the pulse waveform in units of seconds. Response The 8102 will return the present pulse period value in units of seconds. 5-58 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands 5 AUXiliary:PULse:POLarity{NORMal||COMPlemented|INVerted (?) Description This command will program the polarity of the pulse in reference to the base line level. The polarity options are: Normal, where the pulse is generated exactly as programmed; Inverted, where the pulse is inverted about the 0 level base line; and Complemented, where the pulse is inverted about its mid amplitude level. Parameters Name Type Default Description NORMal Discrete NORM Programs normal pulse output COMPlemeted Discrete Programs complemented pulse output INVerted Discrete Programs an inverted pulse output Response The 8102 will return NORM, COMP or INV depending on the present polarity setting AUXiliary:PULse{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description Use this command to disable a specific channel from calculating pulse parameters. This is specifically useful for accelerating pulse computation for channels that are needed for pulse generation. Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 0 Toggles pulse computation for a specific channel on and off Response The 8102 will return 0, or 1 depending on the present state setting. AUXiliary:PULse:TRANsition<rise>(?) Description This command will program the interval it will take the pulse to transition from its low to high level settings. The parameter is programmed in units of seconds. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <rise> 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e-3 Will set the rise time parameter. Note that the sum of all parameters, including the rise time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters. 5-59 8101/8102 User Manual Response The 8102 will return the present rise time value in units of seconds. AUXiliary:PULse:TRANsition:TRAiling<fall>(?) Description This command will program the interval it will take the pulse to transition from its high to low level settings. The parameter is programmed in units of seconds. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <fall> 0 to 1e3 Numeric 1e-3 Will set the fall time parameter. Note that the sum of all parameters, including the fall time must not exceed the programmed pulse period and therefore, it is recommended that the pulse period be programmed before all other pulse parameters. Response The 8102 will return the present fall time value in units of seconds. 5-60 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands System Commands 5 The system-related commands are not related directly to waveform generation but are an important part of operating the 8102. These commands can reset or test the instrument, or query the instrument for system information. Table 5-8, System Commands Summary Keyword Parameter Form Default :RESet (*RST) :SYSTem :ERRor? :LOCal :VERSion? :INFOrmation :CALibration? :MODel? :SERial? :IP [:ADDRess] <IP_address> :MASK <mask> :GATeway <gate_way> :BOOTp OFF | ON | 0 | 1 HOSTname: <host_name> 0 :KEEPalive :STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 1 :TIMEout 2 to 300 45 PROBes 2 to 10 2 :TEMPerature? RESet, or *RST Description This command will reset the 8102 to its factory defaults. SYSTem:ERRor? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the 8102 for programming errors. Response The 8102 will return error code. Error messages are listed later in this manual. 5-61 8101/8102 User Manual SYSTem:LOCal Description This command will deactivate the active interface and will restore the 8102 to local (front panel) operation. SYSTem:VERSion? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the 8102 for its current firmware version. The firmware version is automatically programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user except when performing firmware update. Response The 8102 will return the current firmware version code in a format similar to the following: 1.35 SYSTem:INFormation:CALibration? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the instrument for its last calibration date. Response The generator will return the last calibration date in a format similar to the following: 24 Oct 2006 (10 characters maximum). SYSTem:INFormation:MODel? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the instrument for its model number in a format similar to the following: 8102. The model number is programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user. Response The generator will return its model number either 8101 or 8102. SYSTem:INFormation:SERial? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the instrument for its serial number. The serial number is programmed to a secure location in the flash memory and cannot be modified by the user. Response The generator will return its serial number in a format similar to the following: 000000451 (10 characters maximum). 5-62 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands 5 SYSTem:IP<ip_adrs>(?) Description This command programs the IP address for LAN operation. The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers. Parameters Name Range Type Description <ip_adrs> 0 to 255 String Programs the IP address for LAN operation. Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces. Current IP address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display. Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following: 192.168.0.6 SYSTem:IP:MASK<mask_adrs>(?) Description This command programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation. The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers. Parameters Name Range Type Description <mask_adrs> 0 to 255 String Programs the subnet mask address for LAN operation. Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces. Current subnet mask address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display. Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following: 255.255.255.0 SYSTem:IP:BOOTp{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description Use this command to toggle BOOTP mode on and off. Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 0 Toggles BOOTP mode on and off. When on, the IP address is administrated automatically by the system Response The 8102 will return 0, or 1 depending on the present BOOTP setting. 5-63 8101/8102 User Manual SYSTem:IP:GATeway<gate_adrs>(?) Description This command programs the gateway address for LAN operation. The programming must be performed from either USB or GPIB controllers. Parameters Name Range Type Description <gate_adrs> 0 to 255 String Programs the gateway address for LAN operation. Programming must be performed from USB or GPIB interfaces. Current gateway address can be observed on LAN Properties front panel display. Response The 8102 will return the present IP address value similar to the following: 0.0.0.0 SYSTem:IP:HOSTname<name>(?) Description This command programs the host name address for LAN operation. The programming is performed in the factory and it is highly suggested that users do not change the host name without first consulting a Tabor customer service person. Parameters Name Type Description <name> String Programs the host name for LAN operation. Response The 8102 will return a string containing the host name. String length is 16 characters. SYSTem:KEEPalive:STATe{OFF|ON|0|1}(?) Description Use this command to toggle the keep alive mode on and off. The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing. Parameters Range Type Default Description 0-1 Discrete 1 Toggles the keep alive mode on and off. When on, the 8102 constantly checks for smooth LAN connection at intervals programmed by the syst:keep:time command. The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst:keep:prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication. When communication fails, the 8102 reverts automatically to local (front panel) operation. Response The 8102 will return 0, or 1 depending on the present keep alive setting. 5-64 Remote Programming Reference Auxiliary Commands 5 SYSTem:KEEPalive:TIMEout<time_out>(?) Description This command programs the keep alive time out. The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <time_out> 2 to 300 Numeric 45 Programs the keep alive time out in units of seconds. The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period. The LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by syst:keep:prob parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication. When communication fails, the 8102 reverts automatically to local (front panel) operation. Response The 8102 will return the present keep alive time out value. SYSTem:KEEPalive:PROBes<probs>(?) Description This command programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence. The keep alive mode assures that LAN connection remains uninterrupted throughout the duration of the LAN interfacing. Parameters Name Range Type Default Description <time_out> 2 to 10 Numeric 2 Programs the number of probes that are used by the keep alive sequence. The time out period is initiated when the LAN is idle for more than the time out period and the LAN will be probed as many times as programmed by this parameter to check if there is an interruption in the LAN communication. When communication fails, the 8102 reverts automatically to local (front panel) operation. Response The 8102 will return the present keep alive number of probes. SYSTem:TEMPerature? Description Query only. This query will interrogate the 8102 for its internal temperature reading. Response The 8102 will return the current internal temperature value in units of degrees C, similar to the following: 40.00 5-65 8101/8102 User Manual IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar commands that perform similar functions, the IEEE-STD-488.2 document has specified a common set of commands and queries that all compatible devices must use. This avoids situations where devices from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable functions and report status. The IEEE-STD-488.2 treats common commands and queries as device dependent commands. For example, *TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument. Some common commands and queries are optional, but most of them are mandatory. The following is a complete listing of all common-commands and queries, which are used by the 8102 *CLS - Clear the Status Byte summary register and all event registers. *ESE <enable_value> - Enable bits in the Standard Event enable register. The selected bits are then reported to the status byte. *ESE? - Query the Standard Event enable register. The generator returns a decimal value, which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits, set in the register. *ESR? - Query the Standard Event register. The generator returns a decimal value, which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits, set in the register. *IDN? - Query the generator’s identity. The returned data is organized into four fields, separated by commas. The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields, and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four. If the latter information is not available, the device must return an ASCII 0 for each. For example, Model 8102 response to *IDN? is: Tabor,8102,0,1.0 *OPC - Set the "operation complete" bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed. *OPC? - Returns "1" to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed. *OPC? is used for synchronization between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue. The *OPC? query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR). Reading the response to the *OPC? query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument. However, both the system bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold-off state while the controller is waiting to read the *OPC? query response. *OPT? - Returns the value “0” for a 8102 with no options. *RST - Resets the generator to its default state. Default values are listed in Table 5-1. *SRE <enable_value> - Enables bits in the Status Byte enable register. *SRE? - Query the Status Byte enable register. The generator returns 5-66 Remote Programming Reference IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries 5 a decimal value in the range of 0 to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 (RSQ) cannot be set. The binary-weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register. *STB? - Query the Status Byte summary register. The *STB? command is similar to a serial poll but is processed like any other instrument command. The *STB? command returns the same result as a serial poll, but the "request service" bit (bit 6) is not cleared if a serial poll has occurred. *TRG - Triggers the generator from the remote interface. This command effects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to "BUS". *WAI – Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface. The SCPI Status Registers The Model 8102 uses the Status Byte register group and the Standard Event register group to record various instrument conditions. Figure 5-1 shows the SCPI status system. An Event Register is a read-only register that reports defined conditions within the generator. Bits in an event register are latched. When an event bit is set, subsequent state changes are ignored. Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the *CLS command. The *RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register. Querying an event register returns a decimal value, which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits, set in the register. An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit. The user can read from and write to an Enable Register. Querying an Enable Register will not clear it. The *CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear bits in the event registers. To enable bits in an enable register, write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of the bits required to enable in the register. The Status Byte Register (STB) The Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other registers. Query data waiting in the generator's output buffer is immediately reported through the Message Available bit (bit 4). Bits in the summary register are not latched. Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register. Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following: Bit 0 - Decimal value 1. Not used, always set to 0. Bit 1 - Decimal value 2. Not used, always set to 0. 5-67 8101/8102 User Manual Bit 2 - Decimal value 4. Not used, always set to 0. Bit 3 - Decimal value 8. Not used, always set to 0. Bit 4 - Decimal value 16. Message Available Queue Summary Message (MAV). The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty. The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty. This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller. The controller can, for example, send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true. If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV, all system bus activity is held up until the device responds. Bit 5 - Decimal value 32. Standard Event Status Bit (ESB) Summary Message. This bit indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register. Bit 6 - Decimal value 64. Master Summary Status (MSS)/Request Service (RQS) Bit. This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service. The MSS bit is not part of the IEEE-STD-488.1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll. However, the RQS bit, if set, will be sent in response to a serial poll. Bit 7 - Decimal value 128. Not used, always set to 0. Reading the Status Byte Register The Status Byte summary register can be read with the *STB? common query. The *STB? common query causes the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS (Master Summary Status) summary message as a single <NR1 Numeric Response Message> element. The response represents the sum of the binary-weighted values of the Status Byte Register. The *STB? common query does not alter the status byte. Clearing the Status Byte Register Removing the reasons for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register. Sending the *CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages. With the output queue empty, the MAV summary message is set to FALSE. Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs. 5-68 Remote Programming Reference Power On User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control Operation Complete IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 Standard Event Status Register *ESR? & Logical OR & & & & & Queue Not Empty & & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 { Service Request Generation Standard Event Status Register *ESE <value> *ESE? Output Queue RQS 7 6 ESB MAV { 3 2 1 0 MSS read by Serial Poll Status Byte Register read by *STB? & Logical OR & & & & & { & 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Service Request Enable Register *SRE <value> *SRE? Figure 5-5. SCPI Status Registers 5-69 8101/8102 User Manual Service Request Enable Register (SRE) The Service Request enable register is an 8-bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register. Thus, the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register. The Service Request Enable Register is read with the *SRE? common query. The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary-weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register. The value of the unused bit 6 is always zero. The Service Request Enable Register is written using the *SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register. A bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition. Consequently, a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition. The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending *SRE0. The generator always ignores the value of bit 6. Summary of *SRE commands is given in the following. *SRE0 - Clears all bits in the register. *SRE1 - Not used. *SRE2 - Not used. *SRE4 - Not used. *SRE8 - Not used. *SRE16 - Service request on MAV. *SRE32 - Service request on ESB summary bit. *SRE128 - Not used. Standard Event Status Register (ESR) The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special applications. The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEESTD-488.2 as specific conditions, which can be monitored and reported back to the user upon request. The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the *ESR? common query. The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a *CLS common command, with a power-on and when read by *ESR?. The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE-STD488.2. Description of the various bits is given in the following: Bit 0 - Operation Complete. Generated in response to the *OPC command. It indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command. Bit 1 - Request Control. This bit operation is disabled on the Model 8102. Bit 2 - Query Error. This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present 5-70 Remote Programming Reference IEEE-STD-488.2 Common Commands and Queries 5 or pending. Bit 3 - Device Dependent Error. This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs. For example, the following command will cause a DDE error: VOLTage 5;:VOLTage:OFFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits, however, the generator is unable to generate such an amplitude and offset combination. Bit 4 - Execution Error. This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator. Bit 5 – Command Error. This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement. Bit 6 - User Request. This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated. This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device. Bit 7 - Power On. This bit indicates that the device's power source was cycled since the last time the register was read. Standard Event Status Enable Register (ESE) The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit. The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8-bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register. Thus, the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of the ESE Register. The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the *ESE? Common query. The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary-weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the *ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register. A bit value one indicates an enabled condition. Consequently, a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition. The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting *ESE0. Summary of *ESE messages is given in the following. *ESE0 – No mask. Clears all bits in the register. *ESE1 – ESB on Operation Complete. *ESE2 – ESB on Request Control. *ESE4 – ESB on Query Error. *ESE8 – ESB on Device Dependent Error. 5-71 8101/8102 User Manual *ESE16 – ESB on Execution Error. *ESE32 – ESB on Command Error. *ESE64 – ESB on User Request. *ESE128 – ESB Power on. Error Messages In general, whenever the 8102 receives an invalid SCPI command, it automatically generates an error. Errors are stored in a special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time. Errors are retrieved in first-in-first-out (FIFO) order. The first error returned is the first error that was stored. When you have read all errors from the queue, the generator responds with a 0,"No error" message. If more than 30 errors have occurred, the last error stored in the queue is replaced with -350, “Queue Overflow”. No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue, the generator responds with 0,"No error". The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a *CLS command has been executed. The *RST command does not clear the error queue. Use the following command to read the error queue: SYSTem:ERRor? Errors have the following format (the error string may contain up to 80 characters): -102,"Syntax error" A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below. -100,"Command error". When the generator cannot detect more specific errors, this is the generic syntax error used. -101,"Invalid Character". A syntactic element contains a character, which is invalid for that type. -102,"Syntax error". Invalid syntax found in the command string. -103,"Invalid separator". An invalid separator was found in the command string. A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon. In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator, it may return error -100 instead of this error. -104,"Data type error". The parser recognized a data element different than allowed. -108,"Parameter not allowed". More parameters were received than expected for the header. -109,"Missing parameter". Too few parameters were received for the command. One or more parameters that were required for the command were omitted. 5-72 Remote Programming Reference Error Messages 5 -128."Numeric data not allowed". A legal numeric data element was received, but the instrument does not accept one in this position. -131,"Invalid suffix". A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter. The suffix may have been misspelled. -148,"Character data not allowed". A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument. -200,"Execution error". This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors. Execution error as defined in IEEE-488.2 has occurred. -221,"Setting conflict". Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an error. Listed below are events causing setting conflicts. 1. Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100. Corrective action: Change parameters to correct the problem. 2. ampl/2 + |offset| is more than 16. Corrective action: Reduce offset to 0, then change amplitude-offset values to correct the problem. 3. Activating filters when the 8102 is set to output the built-in sine waveform, or activating the built-in sine waveform when one of the 8102 filters is turned on. Corrective action: If in sine, select another function and activate the filter(s). 4. Activating burst mode when the 8102 is set to sequence mode, or activating sequence mode when the 8102 is set to burst mode. Corrective action: Remove the 8102 from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode. 5. Changing operating mode from triggered to continuous when the 8102 is set to single sequence advance, or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 8102 is set to automatic sequence advance mode. Corrective action: Observe the 8102 advance mode while setting sequence advance. -222,”Data out of range”. Parameter data, which followed a specific header, could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator. -224,”Illegal parameter value”. A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command. An invalid parameter choice may have been used. -300,”Device-specific-error”. This is the generic device-dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors. A device- specific error as defined in IEEE-488.2 has occurred. -311,”Memory error”. Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument’s memory. -350,”Queue Overflow”. The error queue is full because more than 5-73 8101/8102 User Manual 30 errors have occurred. No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed. The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off, or after a *CLS command has been executed. -410,”Query INTERRUPTED”. A command was received which sends data to the output buffer, but the output buffer contained data from a previous command (the previous data is not overwritten). The output buffer is cleared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed. 5-74 Chapter 6 Performance Checks Title Page What’s in This Chapter...........................................................................................................6-3 Performance Checks .............................................................................................................6-3 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................................................6-3 Warm-up Period .................................................................................................................6-3 Initial Instrument Setting.....................................................................................................6-4 Recommended Test Equipment ............................................................................................6-4 Test Procedures.....................................................................................................................6-4 Frequency Accuracy...........................................................................................................6-4 Frequency Accuracy, Internal Reference .......................................................................6-5 Frequency Accuracy, External 10MHz Reference..........................................................6-5 Amplitude Accuracy............................................................................................................6-6 Amplitude Accuracy, DAC Output...................................................................................6-6 Amplitude Accuracy, DDS Output...................................................................................6-6 Offset Accuracy ..................................................................................................................6-7 Offset Accuracy, DAC Output .........................................................................................6-7 Offset Accuracy, DDS Output .........................................................................................6-8 Squarewave Characteristics...............................................................................................6-8 Squarewave Checks.......................................................................................................6-8 Skew Between Channels................................................................................................6-9 Sinewave Characteristics ...................................................................................................6-9 Sinewave Distortions, DAC Output...............................................................................6-10 Sinewave Spectral Purity, DAC Output ........................................................................6-10 Sinewave Spectral Purity, DDS Output ........................................................................6-11 Sinewave Flatness, DAC Output ..................................................................................6-11 Sinewave Flatness, DDS Output ..................................................................................6-12 Trigger operation Characteristics .....................................................................................6-12 Trigger, Gate, and Burst Characteristics ......................................................................6-13 Mixed Trigger Advance Test.........................................................................................6-13 Delayed Trigger Characteristics ...................................................................................6-15 Re-trigger Characteristics .............................................................................................6-16 Trigger Slope ................................................................................................................6-17 6-1 8101/8102 User Manual Trigger Level................................................................................................................. 6-17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics............................................................................. 6-18 FM - Standard Waveforms............................................................................................ 6-18 Triggered FM - Standard Waveforms ........................................................................... 6-19 FM Burst - Standard Waveforms .................................................................................. 6-20 Gated FM - Standard Waveforms................................................................................. 6-21 Re-triggered FM Bursts - Standard Waveforms ........................................................... 6-22 AM ................................................................................................................................ 6-23 FSK............................................................................................................................... 6-24 PSK .............................................................................................................................. 6-25 Sweep........................................................................................................................... 6-26 SYNC Output operation.................................................................................................... 6-27 SYNC Qualifier - Bit ...................................................................................................... 6-27 SYNC Source ............................................................................................................... 6-27 Waveform Memory Operation .......................................................................................... 6-29 Waveform memory ....................................................................................................... 6-29 Remote Interfaces ............................................................................................................ 6-29 GPIB Control ................................................................................................................ 6-30 USB Control.................................................................................................................. 6-30 LAN Control .................................................................................................................. 6-31 6-2 Performance Checks What’s in This Chapter What’s in This Chapter 6 This chapter provides performance tests necessary to troubleshoot the Model 8102 Universal Waveform Generator. WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel. Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed. CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM PERFORMANCE TESTS IN A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION. Performance Checks The following performance checks verify proper operation of the instrument and should normally be used: 1. As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications; 2. As part of the troubleshooting procedure; 3. After any repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service. Environmental Conditions Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25°C, ±5°C and at relative humidity of less than 80%. If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges, allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure. Warm-up Period Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on. To ensure accuracy, turn on the power to the Model 8102 and allow it to warm-up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure. 6-3 8101/8102 User Manual Initial Instrument Setting To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test, it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test. To reset the Model 8102 to factory defaults, use the Factory Rest option in the Utility menu. Recommended Test Equipment Recommended test equipment for troubleshooting, calibration and performance checking is listed in Table 6-1 below. Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required characteristics. Table -1, Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No. Manufacturer Oscilloscope (with jitter package) LT342 LeCroy Distortion Analyzer 6900B Krohn Hite Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Freq. Counter 6020R Tabor Electronics Spectrum Analyzer E4411 HP Pulse Generator (with manual trigger) 8500 Tabor Electronics Test Procedures Use the following procedures to check the Model 8102 against the specifications. A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A. The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test, what the specifications for the tested function are, and what acceptable limits for the test are. If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits, the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem. Frequency Accuracy Frequency accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the internal oscillators. Both channels same the same output frequency and the same reference oscillators and therefore, the accuracy is tested on channel 1 only. 6-4 Performance Checks Test Procedures Frequency Accuracy, Internal Reference 6 Equipment: Counter Preparation: 1. Configure the counter as follows: Termination: 50 Ω, DC coupled 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the counter input – channel A 3. Configure the 8102, channel 1 as follows: Waveform: Squarewave Amplitude: 2V Output: On Frequency: As specified in Table 6-2 Test Procedure: 1. Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6-2 Table -2, Frequency Accuracy 8102 Setting 10.000000000 Hz 1.0000000000 kHz 100.00000000 kHz 1.0000000000 MHz 100.000000000 MHz Frequency Accuracy, External 10MHz Reference Error Limits ±10 µHz ±1 mHz ±100 mHz ±1 Hz ±100 Hz Counter Reading Pass Fail Equipment: 10MHz reference (at least 0.1ppm), Counter Preparation: 1. Leave counter setting and 8102 connections as in last test 2. Connect the 10MHz reference oscillator to the 8102 rear panel input 3. Configure the 8102 channel 1 as follows: 10 MHz: External Waveform: Squarewave Amplitude: 2V Output: On Frequency: As specified in Table 6-3 Test Procedure 1. Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6-3 Table -3, Frequency Accuracy Using External 10 MHz Reference 8102 Setting 10.000000000 MHz 50.000000000 MHz Error Limits ±1 Hz ±5 Hz Counter Reading Pass Fail 6-5 8101/8102 User Manual Amplitude Accuracy Amplitude accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the output amplifier and attenuators. Each channel has its own set of amplifiers and attenuators and therefore, the accuracy is tested on each channel separately. Amplitude path is checked for both the DAC route (arbitrary and standard waveforms) and the DDS route (CW and modulated waveforms). Amplitude Accuracy, DAC Output Equipment: DMM Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Termination: 50 Ω feedthrough at the DMM input Function: ACV 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1 kHz Output: On Amplitude: As specified in Table 6-4 Test Procedure 1. Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6-4 Table -4, Amplitude Accuracy, DAC output 8102 Amplitude Setting 16.00 V 10.00 V 1.000 V 100.0 mV Amplitude Accuracy, DDS Output Error Limits 5.657 V, ±113 mV 3.535 V, ±59 mV 353.5 mV, ±7 mV 35.35 mV, ±2.1 mV Pass Fail Equipment: DMM Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Termination: 50 Ω feedthrough at the DMM input Function: ACV 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: OFF CW Frequency: 1 kHz Output: On Amplitude: As specified in Table 6-5 Test Procedure 6-6 DMM Reading CH 1 CH 2 Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 1. Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6-5 Table -5, Amplitude Accuracy, DDS output 8102 Amplitude Setting 16.00 V 10.00 V 1.000 V 100.0 mV Error Limits 5.657 V, ±113 mV 3.535 V, ±59 mV 353.5 mV, ±7 mV 35.35 mV, ±2.1 mV DMM Reading CH 1 CH 2 Pass Fail Offset Accuracy Offset accuracy checks tests the accuracy of the offset generators. Each channel has its own set of offset generators and therefore, the accuracy is tested on each channel separately. Offset path is checked for both the DAC route (arbitrary and standard waveforms) and the DDS route (CW and modulated waveforms). Offset Accuracy, DAC Output Equipment: DMM Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Termination: 50 Ω feedthrough at the DMM input Function: DCV 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1 MHz Amplitude: 20 mV Output: On Offset: As specified in Table 6-6 Test Procedure 1. Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6-6 Table -6, Offset Accuracy, DAC Output 8102 Offset Setting +7.800 V +4.000 V 0.000 V -4.000 V -7.800 V Error Limits 7.800 V ±83 mV 4.000 V ±45 mV 0 V ±20 mV -4.000 V ±45 mV -7.800 V ±83 mV DMM Reading CH 1 CH 2 Pass Fail 6-7 8101/8102 User Manual Offset Accuracy, DDS Output Equipment: DMM Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Termination: 50 Ω feedthrough at the DMM input Function: DCV 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the DMM input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: OFF CW Frequency: 1 MHz Amplitude: 6V Output: On Test Procedure 1. Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6-7 Table -7, Offset Accuracy, DDS Output 8102 Offset Setting 0.000 V Error Limits 0 ±20 mV DMM Reading CH 1 CH 2 Pass Fail Squarewave Characteristics This tests the characteristics of the square waveform. It includes transition times, aberrations and skew between channels. Each channel has its own set of amplifiers and attenuators and therefore, the characteristics are tested on each channel separately. Squarewave Checks Equipment: Oscilloscope, 50 Ω, 20 dB attenuator feed through Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB attenuator feed through at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1 MHz Waveform: Squarewave Amplitude: 10 V Output: On Test Procedure 1. Perform Squarewave Characteristics tests on both channels using Table 6-8 6-8 Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 Table -8, Square wave Characteristics Parameter Tested Rise/Fall Time Ringing Over/undershoot Skew Between Channels Error Limits <5 ns <6% + 10 mV <6% + 10 mV Oscilloscope Reading CH 1 CH 2 Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, 50 Ω, 20 dB attenuator feed through Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope 50 ohms input. Use two identical cables to connect with Ch1/2. Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Waveform: Arbitrary SCLK: 250 MS/s Amplitude: 6V Output: On Test Procedure 1. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform (both channels): Wavelength: 1024 Waveform: Square 2. Measure the skew between the channels to be less than 1ns. 3. Program the skew from 1 to 10 and check the phase offset between channels is increased by 4 ns with every offset step. Test Results Sinewave Characteristics Pass Fail This tests the characteristics of the sine waveform. It includes distortions, spectral purity and flatness. Each channel has its own set of amplifiers and attenuators and therefore, the characteristics are tested on each channel separately. Tests are done for both the DAC route (arbitrary and standard waveforms) and the DDS route (CW and modulated waveforms). 6-9 8101/8102 User Manual Equipment: Distortion ArbConnection Sinewave Distortions, DAC Output Analyzer, Spectrum Analyzer, and Preparation: 1. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the distortion analyzer input. Configure the 8102 as follows: SCLK: As required by the test Waveform: Arbitrary Amplitude: 5V Output: On 2. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: As required by the test Waveform: Sinewave Test Procedure 1. Perform Sinewave distortion tests on both channels using Table 6-9 Table -9, Sinewave Distortion, DAC Output Tests 8102 SCLK Settings 4 MS/s 40 Ms/s 200 Ms/s Sinewave Points 4000 4000 2000 Sinewave Spectral Purity, DAC Output 8102 Frequency 1.000 kHz 10.00 kHz 100.00 kHz Reading Limits < 0.1 % < 0.1 % < 0.1 % Distortion CH 1 CH 2 Pass Fail Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer Preparation: 1. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the spectrum analyzer input. Use 50Ω and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2. Configure the 8102 as follows: Amplitude: 5V Output: On Frequency: As required by the test Test Procedure 1. Perform sinewave spectral purity, DAC waveforms tests using Table 6-10 Table -10, Sinewave Spectral Purity, DAC Output Test 8102 Freq Settings 10 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 6-10 Reading Limits >43 dBc >30 dBc >25 dBc Spectrum Analyzer, Settings & Results Start Stop CH 1 CH 2 1M 100 M 10 M 200 M 10 M 250 M Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures Sinewave Spectral Purity, DDS Output 6 Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer Preparation: 1. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the spectrum analyzer input. Use 50 Ω and 20 dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2. Configure the 8102 as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: OFF Amplitude: 5V Output: On CW Frequency: As required by the test Test Procedure 1. Perform sinewave spectral purity, DDS Waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6-11 Table -11, DDS CW Spectral Purity Test. 8102 CW Freq 10 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz Reading Limits >40 dBc >30 dBc >25 dBc Sinewave Flatness, DAC Output Spectrum Analyzer, Settings & Results Start Stop CH 1 CH 2 1M 100 M 10 M 200 M 10 M 250 M Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Amplitude: 6V Output: On Frequency: Initially, 1 kHz then, as required by the test Test Procedure 1. Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2. Perform Sine flatness, DAC waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6-12 6-11 8101/8102 User Manual Table -12, Sinewave Flatness, DAC Output Test 8102 Sine Frequency 1 MHz 10 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz Error Limits 6 Divisions 6 ±0.15 Divisions 6 ±1.2 Divisions 6 ±1.2 Divisions Sinewave Flatness, DDS Output Oscilloscope Reading CH 1 CH 2 Reference Reference Pass X Fail X Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: OFF Amplitude: 6V Output: On CW Frequency: Initially, 1 kHz then, as required by the test Test Procedure 1. Adjust the vertical controls of the Oscilloscope to get 6 division of display 2. Perform Sine flatness, DDS waveforms tests on both channels using Table 6-13 Table -13, Sinewave Flatness, DDS Output Test 8102 Sine Frequency 1 MHz 10 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz Trigger operation Characteristics 6-12 Error Limits 6 Divisions 6 ±0.15 Divisions 6 ±1.2 Divisions 6 ±1.2 Divisions Oscilloscope Reading CH 1 CH 2 Reference Reference Pass X Fail X This tests the operation of the trigger circuit. It includes tests for the triggered, gated and counted bursts run modes. It also tests the operation of the trigger advance options, the delayed trigger and retrigger functions, as well as the trigger input level and slope sensitivity. The run modes are common to both channels and therefore the tests are performed on channel 1 only. Performance Checks Test Procedures Trigger, Gate, and Burst Characteristics 6 Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator, counter Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20d B feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 1 MHz Run Mode: As required by the test Wave: TTL Square 4. Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 28 MHz Waveform: Sinewave Burst Count: 1e6 counts, each channel Amplitude: 1V Trigger Source: External Output: On Test Procedure 1. Perform trigger and gate tests using Tables 6-14 2. Configure the counter to TOTB Measurements and perform burst tests using Tables 6-14. Set counter trigger level to 100mV. Table -14, Trigger, gate, and burst Characteristics. 8102 Run Mode Triggered Gated Burst External Trigger Pulse 1 MHz, Continuous 1 MHz, Continuous Single shot Mixed Trigger Advance Test Oscilloscope Reading CH 1 CH 2 Triggered waveform Triggered waveform Gated Waveform Gated Waveform Burst, 1e6 waveforms Burst, 1e6 waveforms Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test Run Mode: Single 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 6-13 8101/8102 User Manual 3. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 100 kHz Run Mode: Continuous Wave: TTL Square from the main output. 4. Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5. Configure the 8102, channel 1 only, as follows: Frequency: 28 MHz Waveform: Sinewave Run Mode: Burst Burst Count: 5 counts, each channel Trigger Delay: On Delay: 5s Amplitude: 5V Trigger Source: Mixed Output: On Test Procedure 1. Note that no signal is shown on the oscilloscope 2. From ArbConnection, press the MAN TRIG button. 3. Note and record the time that lapsed from when you pressed MANUAL Trigger button until you first see the burst of 5 sine waveforms. Lapsed time should be 5 seconds Test Results Pass Fail 4. Modify oscilloscope setting to Auto, or Normal and observe that bursts of 5 sine cycles appear at 10μs intervals Test Results 6-14 Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures Delayed Trigger Characteristics 6 Equipment: Function generator, 50 Ω “T” connector, Counter, ArbConnection CAD Preparation: 1. Configure the Function generator as follows: Amplitude: 1V Frequency: 1 MHz Trigger Mode: Triggered. Wave: Squarewave 2. Place the “T” connector on the output terminal of the function generator. Connect one side of the “T” to the 8102 TRIG IN connector and the other side of the “T” to the channel A input of the counter 3. Connect the 8102 output to channel B input of the counter 4. Configure the counter to TI A to B measurements 5. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 100 points Waveform: Pulse, Delay = 0.1, Rise/Fall = 0, High Time = 99.99 6. Configure the 8102, channel 1 only, as follows: SCLK: 200 MS/s Waveform: Arbitrary Run Mode: Triggered Trigger Level 0V Trigger Delay: On Delay: As required for the test Amplitude: 5V Trigger Source: External Output: On Test Procedure 1. Perform trigger delay tests using Tables 6-15 Table -15, Trigger Delay Tests 8102 Delay Setting 1 μs 1 ms 1s Error Limits 1 μs ±230 ns 1 ms ±50 µs 1 s ±50 ms Counter Reading Pass Fail 6-15 8101/8102 User Manual Re-trigger Characteristics Equipment: Counter, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Configure the counter as follows: Function: Pulse Width Measurement Ch A Slope: Negative 2. Connect the counter channel A to the 8102 output 3. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 100 points Waveform: Pulse, Delay = 0.1, Rise/Fall = 0, High Time = 99.99 4. Configure the 8102, channel 1 only, as follows: SCLK 200 MS/s Waveform: Arbitrary Amplitude: 5V Run Mode: Triggered Trigger Level 0V Re-trigger: On Re-trigger Delay: As required by the test Trigger Source: Bus Output: On Test Procedure 1. Manually trigger the instrument 2. Perform trigger delay tests using Tables 6-16 Table -16, Re-Trigger Delay Tests 8102 Delay Setting 1 μs 1 ms 1s 6-16 Error Limits 1 μs ±85 ns 1 ms ±50 μs 1 s ±50 ms Counter Reading Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures Trigger Slope 6 Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test Trigger Source: External 2. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode: Continue Waveform: TTL Output 4. Connect the function generator TTL output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5. Connect the function generator main output to the 2nd channel of the oscilloscope 6. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1 MHz Waveform: Sine wave Run Mode: Triggered Output: On Test Procedure 1. Toggle 8102 trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 2. Verify on the oscilloscope that the 8102 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Trigger Level Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Termination: 50 Ω, 20 dB feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input Setup: As required for the test 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 10 kHz Run Mode: Continuous Waveform: Squarewave. Amplitude: 1V 4. Connect the function generator output to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 5. Configure the 8102 as follows: 6-17 8101/8102 User Manual Frequency: Waveform: Run Mode: Trigger level: Ch1 Output: 1 MHz Sine wave Triggered 0V On Test Procedure 1. Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at0.1 ms 2. Modify the function generator offset to +2 V and change the 8102 trigger level to +4 V. Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0.1ms 3. Modify the function generator offset to -2 V and change the 8102 trigger level to -4 V. Verify that the 8102 outputs triggered waveforms spaced at 0.1ms Test Results Pass Fail Modulated Waveforms Characteristics This tests the operation of the modulation circuits. It includes tests for the various modulation functions: FM, AM, FSK, PSK and Sweep. Since the run modes are common to all modulation functions, they are being tested on the FM function only. The tests are performed on each channel. FM - Standard Waveforms Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 50 μs Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FM Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 10 kHz Deviation: 500 kHz Sync: On Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows: 6-18 Performance Checks Test Procedures Waveform: Frequency: Max A: Min A: Pass Test Results 2. 3. 4. 5. Test Results Triggered FM Standard Waveforms Fail Fail Move 8102 marker position to 1.25MHz and verify marker position Pass Test Results Sine 10 kHz 1.25 MHz 750 kHz Modify 8102 modulating waveform to triangle, then square and ramp and verify FM waveforms as selected Pass Test Results 6 Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.2 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure the function generator as follows: 6-19 8101/8102 User Manual 5. 6. Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode: Continuous Waveform: Squarewave. Amplitude: 2V Offset: 1V Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FM Mod Run Mode: Triggered Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 10 kHz Deviation: 500 kHz Sync: On Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify triggered FM – standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Triggered sine waves Sine Frequency: 10 kHz Trigger Period: 1 ms Max A: 1.25 MHz Min A: 750 kHz Test Results FM Burst - Standard Waveforms 6-20 Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.2 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode: Continuous Waveform: Squarewave. Amplitude: Adjust to TTL level on 5 Ω 5. Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector Performance Checks Test Procedures 6. 6 Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FM Modulation Run Mode: Burst Burst: 5 Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 10 kHz Deviation: 500 kHz Sync: On Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify Burst FM – standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Burst of 5 Sine waveforms Sine Frequency: 10 kHz Burst Period: 1 ms Max A: 1.25 MHz Min A: 750 kHz Test Results Gated FM - Standard Waveforms Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope, function generator Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.2 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure the function generator as follows: Frequency 1 kHz Run Mode: Continuous Waveform: Squarewave. Amplitude: 2V Offset: 1V 5. Connect the function generator output connector to the 8102 TRIG IN connector 6. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FM Mod Run Mode: Gated Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 10 kHz 6-21 8101/8102 User Manual Deviation: Sync: Output: 500 kHz On On Test Procedure: 1. Verify Gated FM – standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Gated sine waveforms Sine Frequency: 10 kHz Gated Period: 1 ms Max A: 1.25 MHz Min A: 750 kHz Test Results Re-triggered FM Bursts - Standard Waveforms Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.2 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FM Modulation Run Mode: Burst Burst Count: 5 Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 10 kHz Deviation: 500 kHz Sync: On Re-trigger: On Re-trigger Delay: 200 μs Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify re-triggered FM burst – standard waveforms operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Repetitive burst of 5-cycle sine waveforms Sine Frequency: 10 kHz Re-trigger delay: 200 μs Max A: 1.25 MHz Min A: 750 kHz 6-22 Performance Checks Test Procedures Pass Test Results 6 Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope AM Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.5 ms Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: AM Carrier Freq: 1 MHz Mod Frequency: 1 kHz Mod Depth: 50 % Mod Wave Ch1 Sine Mod Wave Ch2 Triangle Sync: On Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Amplitude modulated sine Mod depth: 50 % ±5 % Pass Test Results 2. 3. Test Results Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 but observe a triangle modulating wave form. Pass Fail 6-23 8101/8102 User Manual Equipment: Oscilloscope FSK Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.1 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div. 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: FSK Carrier Freq: 2 MHz Shift Frequency: 4 MHz Baud Rate: 10 kHz Marker Index: 1 Sync: On Output: On 5. Using ArbConnection, prepare and download 10-step FSK list with alternating “0” and “1” Test Procedure: 1. Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Squarewave Period: 0.2 ms Max Freq.: 4 MHz Min Freq.: 2 MHz Pass Test Results 2. 3. Test Results 6-24 Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 Equipment: Oscilloscope PSK Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 50 μs Amplitude: 1 V/div. 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Reset Waveform: Modulated Modulation: PSK Carrier Freq: 10 kHz Shift Phase: 180 degrees Baud Rate: 10 kHz Sync: On Output: On 5. Using ArbConnection, prepare and download 10-step PSK list with alternating “0” and “1” Test Procedure: 1. Verify PSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Sinewave Period: 0.1 ms Phase: Every 0.1 ms change 180 degrees Pass Test Results 2. 3. Test Results Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Pass Fail 6-25 8101/8102 User Manual Sweep Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: 0.2 ms Sampling Rate: 50 MS/s at least. Trace A View: Jitter, Type: FREQ, CLK. Trigger source: Channel 2, positive slope Amplitude: 1 V/div 2. Connect 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 3. Connect the 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 4. Configure model 8102 controls on both channels as follows: Waveform: Modulated Modulation: Sweep Start Frequency: 1 MHz Stop Frequency: 2 MHz Sweep Time: 1 ms Sweep Type: Linear Sync: On Output: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify Sweep operation on the oscilloscope as follows: Waveform: Ramp up Frequency: 1 kHz Max A: 2 MHz Min A: 1 MHz Pass Test Results 2. 3. Test Results 6-26 Move 8102 sweep marker position to 1.5 MHz and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp Pass Test Results Fail Fail Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify oscilloscope reading as before except the ramp is down Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 4. Change sweep step to logarithmic and verify oscilloscope exponential down waveform with properties as in 3 above Pass Test Results 5. 6. Test Results Fail Remove the cable from 8102 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Pass Fail SYNC Output operation This tests the operation of the SYNC output. There are two parameters being tested, the qualifier and the sync source. The sync output has a fixed TTL level amplitude into an open circuit. SYNC Qualifier - Bit Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: As required by the test Amplitude: 2 V/div 2. Connect 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input 3. Configure model 8102 as follows: Ch1 Waveform: Sine Ch1 Output: On SYNC: On Test Procedure: 1. Verify trace on the oscilloscope shows synchronization pulses at 1 μs intervals Test Results SYNC Source Pass Fail Equipment: Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the oscilloscope as follows: Time Base: As required by the test Amplitude: 2 V/div Trigger Source: Channel 1 6-27 8101/8102 User Manual 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect 8102 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input, channel 1 Connect 8102 CH1 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 2 Connect 8102 CH2 output to the oscilloscope input, channel 3 Configure model 8102 channel 1 and 2 controls as follows: Function: Arbitrary Output: On SYNC: On Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Ch1: 64 points sine waveform Ch2: 100 points sine waveform Test Procedure: 1. Verify that the trace on the oscilloscope is synchronized with the 8102 channel 1 waveform Pass Test Results 2. 3. Test Results 6-28 Fail Modify the 8102 SYNC Source from channel 1 to channel 2 Verify that the trace on the oscilloscope is synchronized with the 8102 channel 2 waveform Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures 6 Waveform Memory Operation This tests the integrity of the waveform memory. The waveform memory stores the waveforms that are being generated at the output connector and therefore, flaws in the memory can cause distortions and impurity of the output waveforms. Each channel has its own working memory and therefore each channel is tested separately. Waveform memory Equipment: Distortion Analyzer, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Connect 8102 Channel outputs to the distortion analyzer input. Configure the 8102 as follows: SCLK: As required by the test Waveform: Arbitrary Amplitude: 5V Output: On 2. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 512k Waveform: Sine wave SCLK 250 MS/s Test Procedure 1. Perform Sine wave distortion. It should be less than 0.1 % Test Results Remote Interfaces Pass Fail This tests the communication with the 8102 using the various interface options. Connecting and setting up the 8102 for operation with the various interface options is described in Chapter 2. Before you proceed with and of the following tests, make sure first that the 8102 is configured to operate with the selected test. GPIB operation requires setting of the GPIB address, LAN operation requires correct setting of the LAN parameters and USB operation requires that the USB port is configured correctly and USB driver installed on the host computer. 6-29 8101/8102 User Manual GPIB Control Equipment: Distortion Analyzer, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Set up the 8102 for GPIB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2. Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input. 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: SCLK: 250 MS/s Waveform: Arbitrary Output: On 4. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 512k points Waveform: Sine wave Test Procedure 1. Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2. Perform Sine wave distortion. It should be less than 0.1 % Test Results USB Control Pass Fail Equipment: Distortion Analyzer, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Set up the 8102 for USB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2. Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input. 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: SCLK: 250 MS/s Waveform: Arbitrary Output: On 4. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 512k points Waveform: Sine wave Test Procedure 1. Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2. Perform Sine wave distortion. It should be less than 0. 1 % Test Results 6-30 Pass Fail Performance Checks Test Procedures LAN Control 6 Equipment: Distortion Analyzer, ArbConnection Preparation: 1. Set up the 8102 for USB operation and connect the instrument to a host controller 2. Connect 8102 output to the distortion analyzer input. 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: SCLK: 250 MS/s Waveform: Arbitrary Output: On 4. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 512k points Waveform: Sine wave Test Procedure 1. Check the resulting trace on the oscilloscope 2. Perform Sine wave distortion. It should be less than 0.1 % Test Results Pass Fail 6-31 8101/8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank 6-32 Chapter 7 Adjustments and Firmware Update Title Page What’s in This Chapter...........................................................................................................7-3 Performance Checks .............................................................................................................7-3 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................................................7-3 Warm-up Period .................................................................................................................7-3 Recommended Test Equipment ............................................................................................7-4 Adjustment Procedures..........................................................................................................7-4 Reference Oscillators Adjustments........................................................................................7-6 Base Line Offset Adjustments ............................................................................................7-8 Offset Adjustments ...........................................................................................................7-11 Amplitude Adjustments.....................................................................................................7-15 Pulse Response Adjustments ..........................................................................................7-24 Flatness Adjustments .......................................................................................................7-24 Base Line Offset Adjustments ..........................................................................................7-29 Offset Adjustments ...........................................................................................................7-32 Amplitude Adjustments.....................................................................................................7-36 Pulse Response Adjustments ..........................................................................................7-44 Flatness Adjustments .......................................................................................................7-45 Updating 8102 Firmware......................................................................................................7-49 7-1 8101/8102 User Manual 7-2 Adjustments and Firmware Update What’s in This Chapter What’s in This Chapter 7 This chapter provides adjustment information for the 8102 dual channel waveform generator. The same procedures are used for the Model 8101 except all references to the second channel should be ignored. WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel. Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed. CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM DISASSEMBLY, REPAIR CLEANING AT A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION. Performance Checks AND Do not attempt to calibrate the instrument before you verify that there is no problem with the functionality of the product. A complete set of specification is listed in Appendix A. If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits, the instrument must be tested to find the source of the problem. In case there is a reasonable suspicion that an electrical problem exist within the 8102, perform a complete performance checks as given in Chapter 6 to verify proper operation of the instrument. Environmental Conditions The 8102 can operate from 0°C to 50°C. Adjustments should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25°C, ±5°C and at relative humidity of less than 80%. Turn on the power to the 8102 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the adjustment procedure. If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges, allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure. Warm-up Period Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on. To ensure accuracy, turn on the power to the Model 8102 and allow it to warm-up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure. 7-3 8101/8102 User Manual Recommended Test Equipment Recommended equipment for adjustments is listed in Table 7-1. Instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required minimal characteristics. Also listed below are accessories required for calibration. Table 7-1, Recommended calibration for Adjustments Equipment Model No. Manufacturer Oscilloscope (with jitter package) LC684 LeCroy Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Frequency Counter (Rubidium reference) 6020R Tabor Electronics Function Generator (with manual trigger) 8020 Tabor Electronics Accessories BNC to BNC cables 50Ω Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Adjustment Procedures Use the following procedures to calibrate the Model 8102. The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration and what the acceptable calibration limits are. Calibration is done with the covers closed and the 8102 connected through an interface to a host computer. Any interface can be used from the following: USB, LAN, or GPIB. Calibration requires that ArbConnection utility be installed and interfaced to the instrument. Calibration is performed from the Calibration Panel in ArbConnection. To invoke this panel, one requires a password that is available to service centers only. Contact your nearest Tabor service center for information and permit to obtain your calibration password. Use the following procedure to calibrate the generator: 1. Invoke ArbConnection 2. Click on the UTIL icon on the Panels bar 3. On the Utility Panel click on Calibration and expect to be prompted with the following dialog box 7-4 Adjustments and Firmware Update Adjustment Procedures 7 Figure 7-1, Calibration Password 4. Type your User Name Password and click on OK. The Calibration Panel as shown in Figure 7-2 will appear. Figure 7-2, Calibration Panel NOTE Initial factory adjustments require that the covers be removed from the instrument. Field calibration does not require re-adjustments of these factory settings unless the unit was repaired in an authorized service center. Factory adjustments are enclosed in parentheses to differentiate from normal field calibration setups; bypass these adjustments when performing field calibration. 7-5 8101/8102 User Manual Calibrations are marked with numbers from 1 to 50 and, except the (50M) and 10M adjustments in the Selection group, should be carried out exactly in the order as numbered on the panel. There are separate adjustments for Channel 1 and Channel 2 so make sure that the output cables are connected to the appropriate channel during the adjustments. The numbers that are associated with each adjustment are identified as Setup Number at the title of each of the adjustments in the following procedure. Remote adjustments have the range of 1 through 256 with the center alignment set to 128. Therefore, if you are not sure of the direction, set the adjustment to 128 and add or subtract from this value. If you have reached 1 or 256 and were not able to calibrate the range, there is either a problem with the way you measure the parameter or possibly there is a problem with the instrument. In either case, do not leave any adjustment in its extreme setting but center the adjustment and contact your nearest service center for clarifications and support. Note in the following procedures that although configuration of the 8102 is done automatically, some of the configuration is shown for reference. There is no requirement to change configuration of the 8102 during the remote adjustment procedure except in places where specifically noted. Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7-6 Use this procedure to adjust the reference oscillators. The reference oscillators determine the accuracy of the output frequency so if you suspect that there is an accuracy issue, proceed with the calibration of the reference oscillators Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments (Setup 50M) 7 50MHz Gated Oscillator Adjustment Equipment: Counter, Function Generator, BNC to BNC cables, Preparation: 1. Configure the counter as follows: Termination: 50Ω DC Function: TI A -> B Slope B: Negative 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input 3. Connect an external function generator to the rear panel TRIG IN connector 4. Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform: Wavelength: 100 points Waveform: Pulse: Delay = 0.01%, Rise/Fall Time = 0%, High Time = 99.99% 5. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function Mode: Arbitrary Run Mode: Triggered Retrigger Mode: On Retrigger Delay: 20μs 6. Using an external function generator, manually trigger the 8102 Adjustment: 1. Adjust C18 for a period of 20μs, ±5% Setup 10M 10MHz TCXO Frequency Equipment: Counter, BNC to BNC cables Preparation: 1. Configure the counter as follows: Function: Freq A Termination: 50Ω 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the counter input. 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 10MHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 2V Wave: Square Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP57 for counter reading of 10MHz, ±2Hz Channel 1 Adjustments The following procedures pertain to the channel 1 output only. Therefore, make sure that your connections are made to the channel 1 connectors. 7-7 8101/8102 User Manual Base Line Offset Adjustments The base line offset adjustments assure that the AC signal is symmetrical around the 0V line. Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue. Setup 1 Amplifier Offset Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feedthrough termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CAL:SERV 1 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP1 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV Setup 2 Pre-Amplifier Offset Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CAL:SERV 2 Adjustment 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP2 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV (Setup 3) Base Line Offset, Low Range, Amplifier Out – Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter 7-8 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch1 Amplitude: 510mV Adjustment 4. Note DMM reading (Setup 4) Base Line Offset, High Range, Amplifier Out – Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch1 Amplitude: 1.590V Adjustment 4. Adjust CAL: SETUP 6 for DMM reading the same as Setup 3 5. Repeat Setup 3 and Setup 4 until the DMM readings are the same +/-10mV. 6. Adjust RV1 for DMM readings of 0V+/-10mV. Setup 5 Base Line Offset, Amplifier In – Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation 7-9 8101/8102 User Manual Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 6V Adjustment 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 5 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV Setup 6 Base Line Offset, Amplifier Out – Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 6 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV Setup 7 Base Line Offset, Amplifier In – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 6V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 7 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV Setup 8 Base Line Offset, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 7-10 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL: SETUP 8 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV Offset Adjustments The offset adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue. Setup 9 Offset (+1V) Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 2V Ch1 Offset +1V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 61 for DMM reading of +1V, ± 5mV Setup 10 Offset (+3V) Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate 7-11 8101/8102 User Manual the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 2V Ch1 Offset +3V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 60 for DMM reading of +3V, ± 15mV Setup 11 +5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset +5V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 59 for DMM reading of +5V, ± 25mV Setup 12 +7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset +7V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 58 for DMM reading of +7V, ± 35mV; 7-12 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 13 7 -1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 2V Ch1 Offset -1V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 62 for DMM reading of -1V, ± 5mV Setup 14 -3V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 2V Ch1 Offset -3V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 63 for DMM reading of -3V, ± 15mV Setup 15 -5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 7-13 8101/8102 User Manual 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset -5V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 64 for DMM reading of -5V, ± 25mV Setup 16 -7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset -7V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 65 for DMM reading of -7V, ± 35mV Setup 17 (+) Offset, Output Amplifier Out Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset +1V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL:SETUP14 for DMM reading of +1V, ±5mV; Note reading Setup 18 (-) Offset, Output Amplifier Out Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, 7-14 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch1 Amplitude: 20mV Ch1 Offset -1V Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL:SETUP14 for DMM reading of -1V, ±5mV; note reading 5. Repeat steps Setup 17 and Setup 18 until errors are balanced between the steps Amplitude Adjustments The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude accuracy is an issue. Setup 19 10V Amplitude - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 10V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP17 for DMM reading of 3.535V ±30mV Setup 20 3V Amplitude - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV 7-15 8101/8102 User Manual Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 3V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP18 for DMM reading of 1.0606V ±7mV Setup 21 1V Amplitude, Output Amplifier In – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 5 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP19 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 22 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier In – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 6 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP20 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV 7-16 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 23 7 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier In – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 7 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP21for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 24 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier In – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 8 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP22 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV Setup 25 1V Amplitude, Output Amplifier Out – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through 7-17 8101/8102 User Manual termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP23 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 26 500mV Amplitude, Output Amplifier Out – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP24 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 27 100mV Amplitude, Output Amplifier Out – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 100mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP25 for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV 7-18 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 28 7 50mV Amplitude, Output Amplifier Out – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP26 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV Setup 29 10V Amplitude - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 10V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP27 for DMM reading of 3.535V ±30mV Setup 30 3V Amplitude - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through 7-19 8101/8102 User Manual termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude: 3V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP28 for DMM reading of 1.0606 ±7mV Setup 31 1V Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On CAL: SERV 5 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP29 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 32 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 6 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP30 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV 7-20 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 33 7 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On CAL:SERV 7 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP31for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 34 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On CAL: SERV 8 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP32 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV Setup 35 1V Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate 7-21 8101/8102 User Manual the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP33 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 36 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP34 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 37 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 100mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP35 for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV 7-22 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 38 7 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch1 Output: On Ch1 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP36 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV 7-23 8101/8102 User Manual Pulse Response Adjustments The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times, as well as, the aberrations are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue. (Setup 39) Pulse Response, Amplifier Out Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Square Amplitude: 1.5V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 3. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 5. Adjust RV3 for best pulse response (4ns type, 5% aberrations) (Setup 40) Pulse Response, Amplifier In Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Square Amplitude: 6V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input. Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 4. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0.1V Adjustment: 5. Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6. Adjust C1036 for best pulse response (4ns type, 5% aberrations) Flatness Adjustments 7-24 The flatness adjustments assure that the flatness of the amplifier is within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the flatness is an issue. Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 41 7 1MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust the Fine Amplitude of the Oscilloscope to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 42 10MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 10MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP74 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 43 20MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 20MHz Ch1 Output: On 7-25 8101/8102 User Manual Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP75 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 44 30MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 30MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP76 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 45 37.3333333MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 37.3333333MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP77 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 46 56MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 7-26 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 56MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP78 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 47 56.0000001MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 56.0000001MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP79 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 48 80MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 80MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP80 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 49 100MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope 7-27 8101/8102 User Manual Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 100MHz Ch1 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP81 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. (Setup 50) Frequency Flatness – Modulation Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Modulation ON Modulation: Sweep Start Freq: 1MHz Stop Freq: 100MHz Sweep Time: 1ms Marker: 1MHz Amplitude: 6V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input. Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 4. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0.1V Adjustment: 5. Adjust C1016 for the best flatness. 7-28 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 Channel 2 Adjustments The following procedures pertain to the channel 2 output only. Therefore, make sure that your connections are made to the channel 1 connectors. Base Line Offset Adjustments The base line offset adjustments assure that the AC signal is symmetrical around the 0V line. Use this procedure if you suspect that there is a base line accuracy issue. Setup 1 Amplifier Offset Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CAL:SERV 3 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 3 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV Setup 2 Pre-Amplifier Offset Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CAL:SERV 4 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP4 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV 7-29 8101/8102 User Manual (Setup 3) Base Line Offset, Low Range, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch2 Amplitude: 510mV Adjustment: Note DMM reading (Setup 4) Base Line Offset, High Range, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch2 Amplitude: 1.590V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL: SETUP 12 for DMM reading the same as in Setup 3 5. Repeat Setup 3 and Setup 4 until the DMM readings are the same +/-10mV. 6. Adjust RV2 for DMM readings of 0V+/-10mV. Setup 5 Base Line Offset, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 7-30 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 6V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 11 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV Setup 6 Base Line Offset, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Output: On Mode: Modulation Ch2 Amplitude: 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 12 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV Setup 7 Base Line Offset, Amplifier In - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 6V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 9 for DMM reading of 0V, ±20mV 7-31 8101/8102 User Manual Setup 8 Base Line Offset, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 10 for DMM reading of 0V, ±5mV Offset Adjustments The offset adjustments assure that the DC offsets are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the offset accuracy is an issue. Setup 9 +1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 2V Ch2 Offset +1V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 69 for DMM reading of +1V, ± 5mV Setup 10 +3V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: 7-32 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 2V Ch2 Offset +3V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 68 for DMM reading of +3V, ± 15mV Setup 11 +5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2 Offset +5V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 67for DMM reading of +5V, ± 25mV Setup 12 +7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2 Offset +7V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 66 for DMM reading of +7V, ± 35mV 7-33 8101/8102 User Manual Setup 13 -1V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feedthrough termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 2V Ch2 Offset -1V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 70 for DMM reading of -1V, ± 5mV Setup 14 -3VOffset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 2V Ch2 Offset -3V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 71for DMM reading of -3V, ± 15mV Setup 15 -5V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate 7-34 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2 Offset -5V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 72 for DMM reading of -5V, ± 25mV Setup 16 -7V Offset Output Amplifier In Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10 V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 1 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2 Offset -7V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL: SETUP 73for DMM reading of -7V, ± 35mV Setup 17 (+)Offset, Output Amplifier Out Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2Offset +1V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL:SETUP16 for DMM reading of +1V, ±5mV; Note reading 7-35 8101/8102 User Manual Setup 18 (-)Offset, Output Amplifier Out Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: DCV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Ch2 Amplitude: 20mV Ch2Offset -1V Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. CAL:SETUP16 for DMM reading of -1V, ±5mV; note reading 5. Repeat Setup 17 and Setup 18 until errors are balanced between the steps Amplitude Adjustments The amplitude adjustments assure that the AC levels are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the amplitude accuracy is an issue. Setup 19 10V Amplitude – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 10V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP37 for DMM reading of 3.535V ±30mV 7-36 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 20 7 3V Amplitude – Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 3 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 3V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP38 for DMM reading of 1.0606V ±7mV Setup 21 1V Amplitude, Amplifier In - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 9 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP39 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 22 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 7-37 8101/8102 User Manual 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 10 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP40 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 23 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 11 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP41for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 24 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 12 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP42 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV 7-38 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 25 7 1V Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP43 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 26 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP44 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 27 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 7-39 8101/8102 User Manual 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 100mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP45 for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 28 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Arbitrary Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1kHz Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP46 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV Setup 29 10V Amplitude - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 10V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 10V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP47 for DMM reading of 3.535V ±30mV 7-40 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 30 7 3V Amplitude - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude: 3V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP48 for DMM reading of 1.0606V±7mV Setup 31 1V Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 9 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL: SETUP49 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 32 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate 7-41 8101/8102 User Manual the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 10 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL: SETUP50 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 33 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 11 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP51 for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 34 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier In - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On CAL:SERV 12 Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP52 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV 7-42 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments Setup 35 7 1V Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 1V Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP53 for DMM reading of 353.5mV ±3mV Setup 36 500mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 500mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP54 for DMM reading of 176.7mV ±1.5mV Setup 37 100mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 1V 7-43 8101/8102 User Manual 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 100mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP55 for DMM reading of 35,35mV ±0.3mV Setup 38 50mV Amplitude, Amplifier Out - Modulation Equipment: DMM, BNC to BNC cable, 50Ω Feed through termination, Dual banana to BNC adapter Preparation: 1. Configure the DMM as follows: Function: ACV Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the DMM input. Terminate the 8102 output at the DMM input with the, 50Ω Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: CW Frequency: 1kHz Mode: Modulation Ch2 Output: On Ch2 Amplitude 50mV Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP56 for DMM reading of 17,67mV ±0.15mV Pulse Response Adjustments The pulse response adjustments assure that the rise and fall times, as well as, the aberrations are within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the pulse response is an issue. (Setup 39) Pulse Response, Amplifier Out Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Square Amplitude: 1.5V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input. Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 7-44 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 4. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 20mV Adjustment: 5. Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6. Adjust RV4 for best pulse response (4ns type, 5% aberrations) (Setup 40) Pulse Response, Amplifier In Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Square Amplitude: 6V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input. Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 4. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0.1V Adjustment: 5. Adjust vertical trace to 6 divisions 6. Adjust C1073 for best pulse response (4ns type, 5% aberrations) Flatness Adjustments The flatness adjustments assure that the flatness of the amplifier is within the specified range. Use this procedure if you suspect that the flatness is an issue. Setup 41 1MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 1MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust the Fine Amplitude of the Oscilloscope to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. 7-45 8101/8102 User Manual Setup 42 10MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 10MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP82 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 43 20MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 20MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 83 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 44 30MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 30MHz 7-46 Adjustments and Firmware Update Reference Oscillators Adjustments 7 Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 84 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 45 37.3333333MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 37.3333333MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 85 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 46 56MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 56MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 86 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 47 56.0000001MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 7-47 8101/8102 User Manual 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 56.0000001MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP 87 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 48 80MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 80MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP88 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. Setup 49 100MHz Amplitude Equipment: 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination, Oscilloscope Preparation: 1. Configure the Oscilloscope as follows: Input Impedance: 50 ohms Range: 100mV 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the Oscilloscope input. Terminate the 8102 output at the Oscilloscope input with the, 50Ω, 20dB Feed through termination 3. Configure the 8102 as follows: Frequency: 100MHz Ch2 Output: On Adjustment: 4. Adjust CAL:SETUP89 to get the signal of 6 divisions on the screen. 7-48 Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware (Setup 50) 7 Carrier Flatness – Modulation Equipment: Oscilloscope, BNC to BNC cable, 20dB Feedthrough attenuator Preparation: 1. Configure the 8102 as follows: Function: Modulation ON Modulation: Sweep Start Freq: 1MHz Stop Freq: 100MHz Sweep Time: 1ms Marker: 1MHz Amplitude: 6V 2. Connect the 8102 Channel 2 output to the oscilloscope input. Use 20dB Feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope input 3. Set oscilloscope input impedance to 50Ω 4. Set oscilloscope vertical sensitivity to 0.1V Adjustment: 5. Adjust C1061for the best flatness. Updating 8102 Firmware WARNING Only qualified persons may perform Firmware updates. DO NOT even attempt to perform this operation unless you were trained and certified by Tabor as you may inflict damage on the instrument. Always verify with the factory that you have the latest firmware file before you start with your update. Before you update the firmware of your 8102, check the revision level which is installed in your instrument. Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore, if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system, check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem. The revision level of your firmware can be displayed as shown in Figure 7-3. To access this screen, select the TOP menu, then select the Utility soft key and scroll down to the System option. Press Enter and the screen will show with the system information. Check both the Software Version and the Version Date as both should match with the latest release. 7-49 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 7-3, Software Version Screen NOTE Firmware updates are performed with the LAN set as the active interface and with the 8102 communicating with the PC through the network. To update the 8102 firmware, you will have to run the NETConfig utility. If you do not have this utility installed on your computer, run the installation procedure from the enclosed CD. You will not be able to update firmware without the NETConfig utility. To invoke this utility, complete the following steps: 1. Turn power OFF on your 8102 2. Click on NETConfig shortcut on the desktop or select Start »Programs» Tabor Electronics» NETConfig» NETConfig 1.0 The NETConfig window lists Tabor devices found on your subnet. Figure 7-4 shows an example of this display. 3. 7-50 Click on the “Use wait message” to select this option as shown in Figure 7-4. Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware 7 Figure 7-4, The NETConfig Utility 4. Turn power ON on your 8102 and observe that the progress bar, as shown in Figure 7-5, is advancing from left to right. Do not do anything on the 8102 until the progress bar completes its travel to the right end. Tips If the progress bar is not moving check the following for possible problems: 1. If you are connecting to a LAN network, make sure your device is connected with standard LAN wire to your wall plug 2. If you use direct connection from your PC to the 8102, your cable should be cross wired. You can get such cable from any computer store near your area 3. If your network is using a managed switch, it is possible that it is configure to break the package with broadcast address and therefore, the only way to use NetConfig is to connect the instrument directly to the PC with a cross wired cable 7-51 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 7-5, Check for Progress Bar Movement 5. As soon as the progress bar reached the far right hand of the bar, click on the Refresh button. If your device was connected and booted correctly, the device address will appear in the device list, as shown in Figure 7-6. Figure 7-6, WW8102 has been Detected on the LAN Network NOTES Click Refresh again if you do not see your device in the list of Ethernet devices. If you cannot detect your device after a few attempts check that you have not lost the connection as described in previous paragraphs. You can only update instrument(s) that appear in the NETConfig window. 7-52 Adjustments and Firmware Update Updating 8102 Firmware 7 Point and click on the device you want to update. The selected device will now have blue background. Click on the Firmware Up... button. The firmware Update dialog box as shown in Figure 7-7 appears. Figure 7-7, The Firmware Update Dialog Box In the TE NETConfig [Firmware Update] dialog box click on the button to browse and locate the upgrade file. After you select the file its complete path will be displayed in the Flash binary image filename field as shown in Figure 7-8. Make sure the file in the path agrees with that specified by your supervisor. To complete the update process, click on Update and observe the File Transfer Progress bar. The update will complete with a Firmware Update d Successfully message, as shown in Figure 7-9. Click on Back to close NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box and turn off the power to the 8102. The next time you power up the instrument, the device automatically reboots with the new firmware in effect. 7-53 8101/8102 User Manual Figure 7-8, Firmware Update Path Figure 7-9, Firmware Update Completed 7-54 Appendices Appendix A Title Page Specifications.................................................................................................................... A-1 1 8101/8102 User Manual 2 Appendix A Specifications Configuration Output Channels 2, semi-independent Inter-Channel Dependency Separate controls Common Controls Output on/off, amplitude, offset, standard waveforms, user waveforms, user waveform size, sequence table Sample clock, frequency, reference source, trigger modes, trigger advance source, SYNC output, Modulation Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Units Range Resolution and Accuracy Skew Between Channels Channel 2 waveform start trails channel 1 waveform start by a programmable number of points. Waveform points 0 to 512k points 1 point 1 ns (50Ω cables, equal length) Sample Clock Range Continuous Run Mode All Other Run Modes Resolution Accuracy and Stability 10MHz Reference Clock Standard External Frequency Connector Impedance and Level 1.5 S/s to 250 MS/s (300 MS/s, typically at 25°C) 1.5 S/s to 225 MS/s 10 digits Same as reference ≥0.0001% (1 ppm TCXO) initial tolerance over a 19°C to 29°C temperature range; 1ppm/°C below 19°C and above 29°C; 1ppm/year aging rate 10 MHz Rear Panel BNC 10 kΩ ±5%, TTL, 50% ±2% duty cycle, or 50Ω ±5%, 0 dBm, selectable using an internal jumper A-1 8101/8102 User Manual Amplitude Characteristics Amplitude Resolution Accuracy (measured at 1kHz into 50Ω) DC Offset Range Resolution Accuracy 32 mV to 32 Vp-p, output open circuit 10 mV to 16 Vp-p, into 50Ω 4 digits 12 V to 16 Vp-p: ±2% 1.6 V to 11.99 Vp-p: ±(1% + 70 mV) 160 mV to 1.599 Vp-p: ±(1% + 10 mV) 16 mV to 159.9 mVp-p: ±(1% + 5 mV) 0 to ±8 V 1 mV ±(1% ± 1% from Amplitude ±5 mV) Run Modes Description Continuous Triggered Burst Gated Mixed Define how waveforms start and stop. Run modes description applies to all waveform types and functions, except where noted. Continuous operation is specified across the entire sample clock frequency range. Other run modes are limited to 225MS/s. Continuously free-run output of a waveform. Output can be enabled and disabled from a remote interface only Upon trigger, outputs one waveform cycle. Last cycle always completed Upon trigger, outputs a single or multiple preprogrammed number of waveform cycles. (Does not apply to Sequence Mode). Burst is programmable from 1 through 1M cycles Transition enables or disables generator output. Last cycle always completed Same as triggered except first output cycle is initiated by a software trigger. Consequent output requires external triggers through the rear panel TRIG IN connector Trigger Characteristics A-2 Trigger Sources External BUS Rear panel BNC, or front panel manual trigger button Trigger commands from a remote controller only External Trigger Input Impedance Trigger Level Range Resolution Sensitivity Damage Level Frequency Range Slope Minimum Pulse Width 10 kΩ ±5 V 1 mV 200 mV ±12 V DC to 2.5 MHz Positive/Negative transitions, selectable ≥10 ns System Delay (Trigger input to waveform output) Trigger Delay (Trigger input to waveform output) Resolution 6 sample clock cycles+150 ns [(0; 200 ns to 20 s) + system delay] 20 ns Appendices Specifications Error Re-trigger Delay (Waveform end to waveform restart) Resolution Error Trigger Jitter A 6 sample clock cycles + 150 ns + 5% of setting 200 ns to 20 s 20 ns 3 sample clock cycles + 20 ns + 5% of setting ±1 sample clock period Standard Waveforms Frequency Range Sine, Square All other waveforms Frequency Resolution Accuracy & Stability Sine Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Triangle Start Phase Range Start Phase Resolution Square Duty Cycle Range Pulse Delay, Rise/Fall Time, High Time Ranges Ramp Delay, Rise/Fall Time, High Time Ranges Gaussian Pulse Time Constant Range Sinc Pulse “Zero Crossings” Range Exponential Pulse Time Constant Range DC Output Function Range 1 µHz to 100 MHz 1 µHz to 12.5 MHz 11 digits Same as frequency standard 0-360.0° 0.1° 0-360.0° 0.1° 0% to 99.9% 0%-99.99% of period (each independently) 0%-99.9% of period (each independently) 10-200 4-100 -100 to 100 -8 V to +8 V Sine Wave Performance Description Sine wave is created in two different circuits: 1) Computed using the standard sine waveform function, and 2) Generated from the DDS (direct digital synthesis) circuit as CW (carrier wave) for the modulation functions. CW is available when the 8102 is set to Modulation OFF. Performance in the following will refer to either STD sinewave or CW (above case 1 and 2, respectively) THD 0.1% to 100 kHz, STD and CW Harmonics and Spurious at less than 1 Vp-p <-45dBc, <100 MHz <-50dBc, <50 MHz <-55dBc, <25 MHz <-60dBc, <5 MHz Flatness (1 Vp-p, 1MHz ref.) < 1dB to 50 MHz < 2dB to 100 MHz A-3 8101/8102 User Manual Square Wave, Pulse Performance Rise/Fall Time (10%-90%) Aberration, typical Jitter, rms <5 ns, 1 mV to 16 Vp-p <5% 100 ps Pulse Generator Waveforms Operation Programmability Channel Dependency Pulse State Pulse Mode Polarity Period Delay Double Pulse Delay Rise/Fall Times High Time Amplitude Window Low Level High Level The 8102 has a special mode where the instrument type is transformed to operate as a digital pulse generator. When this mode is selected, the operation of the arbitrary waveform and its outputs are disabled and possibly, arbitrary waveforms are overwritten 1. All pulse parameters, except rise and fall times, may be freely programmed within the selected pulse period provided that the ratio between the period and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 512,000 to 1. 2. Rise and fall times, may be freely programmed provided that the ratio between the rise/fall time and the smallest incremental unit does not exceed the ratio of 100,000 to 1. 3. The sum of all pulse parameters must not exceed the pulse period setting Both channels share pulse parameters except level, polarity, delay and state On or Off. On generates pulse output; Off generates 0 Vdc Single or double, programmable Normal, inverted or complemented 80 ns minimum, programmed with 16 ns increments 0 ns min; 2e3 s max 0 ns minimum; 2e3 s max 0 ns minimum; 2e3 s max (actual min = <5 ns) 0 ns minimum 10 mVp-p to 16 Vp-p -8 V to +7.983 V -7.983 V to +8 V Arbitrary Waveforms Vertical Resolution Waveform Segmentation Minimum Segment Size Number of Memory Segments Waveform Segments, size and resolution Custom Waveform Creation Software A-4 16 bits Permits division of waveform memory into smaller segments. 16 points 1 to 10k 4 points size increments from 16 to 512kpoints ArbConnection software allows instrument control and creation of custom waveforms either freehand, with equations or built-in functions or with imported waveforms Appendices Specifications A Modulated Waveforms General Description Carrier Waveform Modulation Source Inter-Channel Phase Relationship Sinewave Internal Channel 2 output is phase offset by 90° relative to channel 1 output Run Modes Off (outputs CW), Continuous, Triggered, Delayed Trigger, Re-trigger, Burst and Gated Interrupted Modulation Carrier Idle Mode On or Off, programmable Run Mode Advance Source Front panel manual trigger, Rear panel TRIG IN, Software commands Trigger Delay (Trigger input to modulation output) [(0; 200 ns to 20 s) + system delay] Resolution 20 ns Error 6 sample clock cycles + 150 ns +5% of setting Re-trigger Delay (Modulation end to modulation restart) 200 ns to 20 s Resolution 20 ns Error 3 sample clock cycles + 20 ns +5% of setting Trigger Parameters All trigger parameters such as level, slope, jitter, etc. apply Sweep Channel Dependency Both channels share sweep parameters Swept Waveform Sine wave Sweep Step Linear or log Sweep Direction Up or Down Sweep Range 10 mHz to 100 MHz Sweep Time 1 μs to 40 s Marker Output Programmable marker at a selected frequency. FM Channel Dependency Modulated Waveform Modulating Waveforms Carrier Frequency Range Modulating Frequency Range Peak Deviation Marker Position AM Channel Dependency Modulated Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Envelop Waveform Envelop Frequency Modulation Depth FSK Channel Dependency Shifted Waveform Carrier/Shifted Frequency Range Baud Range FSK Data Bits Length Marker Output Both channels share FM parameters Sine wave Sine, square, triangle, Ramp 10 Hz to 100 MHz 10 mHz to 350 kHz Up to 50 MHz Programmable at selectable a frequency Both channels share AM parameters except envelop waveform and modulation depth Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz Sine, square, triangle, Ramp 10 mHz to 1 MHz 0% to 100% Both channels share FSK parameters Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 1 bit/sec to 10 Mbits/sec 2 to 4000 Programmable marker at a selected step A-5 8101/8102 User Manual PSK Channel Dependency Shifted Waveform Carrier Frequency Range Phase Shift Range Baud Range PSK Data Bits Length Marker Output Both channels share PSK parameters Sine wave 10 Hz to 100 MHz 0° to 359.99° 1bits/sec to 10Mbits/sec 2 to 4000 Programmable marker at a selected step Front Panel Outputs Main Outputs Connector: Protection Standby Sync Outputs Connector Level Sync Type: Position Front panel BNC, each channel Impedance: 50Ω ±1% Short Circuit to Case Ground, 10s max Output On or Off (Output Disconnected) Front panel BNC TTL Pulse with Arbitrary and Standard Waves; LCOM in Burst Modes (including Burst Modulation); Marker with Modulation Mode only, programmable position Point 0 to maximum segment size, programmable with 4-point resolution GENERAL GPIB Information Connector GPIB Revision SCPI Revision Logical Address Settings DMA Rear panel 25-pin D connector IEEE-488.2 1993.0 1 - 31, configured via front panel programming Downloads arbitrary waveform data. DMA support is required by the controller Ethernet Connector Physical Layer IP address Baud Rate Protocol Rear panel RJ-45, female Twisted pair 10/100Base-T Programmed from the front panel or through the USB port 10/100 Mbit/sec with auto negotiation SCPI commands over TCP/IP. USB Connector Specifications Protocol A-6 Type A receptacle Version 1.1 SCPI commands over USB Appendices Specifications Front Panel Display A Color LCD, 3.8” reflective, 320 x 240 pixels, back-lit Front Panel Indicator LED's Output On SYNC On Green – Output on / off (Separate for each channel) Green – SYNC on / off Power Requirements Mains Input Range Maximum Total Module Power 85 to 265Vac, 47-63 Hz 60W Mechanical Dimensions Weight Environmental Operating temperature Humidity (non-condensing) 212 x 88 x 415 mm (W x H x D) Approximately 3.5 Kg 0 °C - 50 °C 11 °C - 30 °C, 85% 31 °C - 40 °C, 75% EMC Certification CE marked Safety EN61010-1, 2nd revision A-7 8101/8102 User Manual This page was intentionally left blank A-8
